This product is eligible for the P2HD
5 Year Warranty Repair Program. For
details, see page 6.
Operating Instructions
Memory Card Camera-Recorder
Model No.
AG-3DP1G
Before operating this product, please read the instructions carefully and save this manual for future use.
ENGLISH
SS1111AS0 -PS
Printed in Japan
VQT3U56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Read this first! (continued)
indicatesꢁsafetyꢁinformation.
ꢁ
FCC NOTICE (USA)
Thisꢁdeviceꢁcompliesꢁwithꢁpartꢁ15ꢁofꢁtheꢁFCCꢁRules.ꢁOperationꢁisꢁsubjectꢁtoꢁtheꢁfollowingꢁtwoꢁ
conditions:
(1)ꢁThisꢁdeviceꢁmayꢁnotꢁcauseꢁharmfulꢁinterference,ꢁandꢁ(ꢀ)ꢁthisꢁdeviceꢁmustꢁacceptꢁany
interferenceꢁreceived,ꢁincludingꢁinterferenceꢁthatꢁmayꢁcauseꢁundesiredꢁoperation.
CAUTION:
ThisꢁequipmentꢁhasꢁbeenꢁtestedꢁandꢁfoundꢁtoꢁcomplyꢁwithꢁtheꢁlimitsꢁforꢁaꢁClassꢁBꢁdigitalꢁdevice,ꢁ
pursuantꢁtoꢁPartꢁ15ꢁofꢁtheꢁFCCꢁRules.ꢁTheseꢁlimitsꢁareꢁdesignedꢁtoꢁprovideꢁreasonableꢁprotectionꢁ
againstꢁharmfulꢁinterferenceꢁinꢁaꢁresidentialꢁinstallation.ꢁThisꢁequipmentꢁgenerates,ꢁusesꢁandꢁcanꢁ
radiateꢁradioꢁfrequencyꢁenergyꢁand,ꢁifꢁnotꢁinstalledꢁandꢁusedꢁinꢁaccordanceꢁwithꢁtheꢁinstructions,ꢁmayꢁ
causeꢁharmfulꢁinterferenceꢁtoꢁradioꢁcommunications.ꢁHowever,ꢁthereꢁisꢁnoꢁguaranteeꢁthatꢁinterferenceꢁ
willꢁnotꢁoccurꢁinꢁaꢁparticularꢁinstallation.ꢁIfꢁthisꢁequipmentꢁdoesꢁcauseꢁharmfulꢁinterferenceꢁtoꢁradioꢁ
orꢁtelevisionꢁreception,ꢁwhichꢁcanꢁbeꢁdeterminedꢁbyꢁturningꢁtheꢁequipmentꢁoffꢁandꢁon,ꢁtheꢁuserꢁisꢁ
encouragedꢁtoꢁtryꢁtoꢁcorrectꢁtheꢁinterferenceꢁbyꢁoneꢁofꢁtheꢁfollowingꢁmeasures:
•ꢁReorientꢁorꢁrelocateꢁtheꢁreceivingꢁantenna.
•ꢁIncreaseꢁtheꢁseparationꢁbetweenꢁtheꢁequipmentꢁandꢁreceiver.
•ꢁꢁConnectꢁtheꢁequipmentꢁintoꢁanꢁoutletꢁonꢁaꢁcircuitꢁdifferentꢁfromꢁthatꢁtoꢁwhichꢁtheꢁreceiverꢁisꢁ
connected.
•ꢁConsultꢁtheꢁdealerꢁorꢁanꢁexperiencedꢁradio/TVꢁtechnicianꢁforꢁhelp.
Theꢁuserꢁmayꢁfindꢁtheꢁbookletꢁ“SomethingꢁAboutꢁInterference”
availableꢁfromꢁFCCꢁlocalꢁregionalꢁofficesꢁhelpful.
FCC Warning:
ToꢁassureꢁcontinuedꢁFCCꢁemissionꢁlimitꢁcompliance,ꢁfollowꢁtheꢁattachedꢁinstallationꢁinstructionsꢁandꢁ
theꢁuserꢁmustꢁuseꢁonlyꢁshieldedꢁinterfaceꢁcablesꢁwhenꢁconnectingꢁtoꢁhostꢁcomputerꢁorꢁperipheralꢁ
devices.ꢁAlso,ꢁanyꢁunauthorizedꢁchangesꢁorꢁmodificationsꢁtoꢁthisꢁequipmentꢁcouldꢁvoidꢁtheꢁuser’sꢁ
authorityꢁtoꢁoperateꢁthisꢁdevice.
NOTIFICATION (Canada)
ThisꢁclassꢁBꢁdigitalꢁapparatusꢁcompliesꢁwithꢁCanadianꢁICES-003.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Read this first! (continued)
EMC NOTICE FOR THE PURCHASER/USER OF THE APPARATUS
1. Applicable standards and operating environment
The apparatus is compliant with:
standards EN55103-1 and EN55103-2 2009, and
electromagnetic environments E1, E2, E3 and E4.
2. Pre-requisite conditions to achieving compliance with the above standards
<1> Peripheral equipment to be connected to the apparatus and special connecting cables
The purchaser/user is urged to use only equipment which has been recommended by us as peripheral
equipment to be connected to the apparatus.
The purchaser/user is urged to use only the connecting cables described below.
<2> For the connecting cables, use shielded cables which suit the intended purpose of the apparatus.
Video signal connecting cables
Use double shielded coaxial cables, which are designed for 75-ohm type high-frequency applications, for SDI
(Serial Digital Interface).
Coaxial cables, which are designed for 75-ohm type high-frequency applications, are recommended for analog
video signals.
Audio signal connecting cables
If your apparatus supports AES/EBU serial digital audio signals, use cables designed for AES/EBU.
Use shielded cables, which provide quality performance for high-frequency transmission applications, for analog
audio signals.
Other connecting cables
Use shielded cables, which provide quality performance for high-frequency applications, such as connecting
cables for IEEE1394 or USB.
When connecting to the HDMI signal terminal, use multilayer shielded cables, which provide quality
performance for high-frequency applications.
When connecting to the DVI signal terminal, use a cable with a ferrite core.
If your apparatus is supplied with ferrite core(s), they must be attached on cable(s) following instructions in this
manual.
3. Performance level
The performance level of the apparatus is equivalent to or better than the performance level required by these
standards.
However, the apparatus may be adversely affected by interference if it is being used in an EMC environment, such as an
area where strong electromagnetic fields are generated (by the presence of signal transmission towers, cellular phones,
etc.). In order to minimize the adverse effects of the interference on the apparatus in cases like this, it is recommended
that the following steps be taken with the apparatus being affected and with its operating environment:
1. Place the apparatus at a distance from the source of the interference.
2. Change the direction of the apparatus.
3. Change the connection method used for the apparatus.
4. Connect the apparatus to another power outlet where the power is not shared by any other appliances.
EEEYönetmeliğine Uygundur.
EEE Complies with Directive of Turkey.
EU
TO REMOVE BATTERY
Main Power Battery (Ni-Cd / Ni-MH / Li-ion Battery)
●ꢁꢁToꢁdetachꢁtheꢁbattery,ꢁpleaseꢁproceedꢁinꢁtheꢁreverseꢁorderꢁofꢁtheꢁinstallationꢁmethodꢁdescribedꢁinꢁthisꢁmanual.
●ꢁꢁIfꢁaꢁbatteryꢁmadeꢁbyꢁanyꢁotherꢁmanufacturerꢁisꢁtoꢁbeꢁused,ꢁcheckꢁtheꢁOperatingꢁInstructionsꢁaccompanyingꢁtheꢁbattery.
Back-up Battery (Lithium Battery)
●ꢁꢁForꢁtheꢁremovalꢁofꢁtheꢁbatteryꢁforꢁdisposalꢁatꢁtheꢁendꢁofꢁitsꢁserviceꢁlife,ꢁpleaseꢁconsultꢁyourꢁdealer.
Pursuant to at the directive 2004/108/EC, article 9(2)
Panasonic Testing Centre
Panasonic Service Europe, a division of Panasonic Marketing Europe GmbH
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, F.R. Germany
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SDHC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
HDMI, the HDMI logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of
HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and/or other countries.
MMC (Multi Media Card) is a registered trademark of Infineon Technologies AG.
Microsoft®, Windows®, and Windows Vista® are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Screenshots are used in accordance with Microsoft Corporation guidelines.
Apple®, Macintosh®, and Mac OS® are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the United States and other
countries.
Unislot is a registered trademark of Ikegami Tsushinki Co., LTD.
Other model names, company names, and product names listed in these operating instructions are
trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.
This product is licensed under the AVC Patent Portfolio License for the personal and non-commercial use of
a consumer, and no license is granted or shall be implied for any use other than the personal uses detailed
below.
– To encode video in compliance with the AVC standard (“AVC Video”)
– To decode AVC Video that was encoded by a consumer engaged in a personal and non-commercial activity
– To decode AVC Video that was obtained from a video provider licensed to provide AVC Video
• Additional information may be obtained from MPEG LA, LLC (http://www.mpegla.com).
Note concerning illustrations in these instructions
• Illustrations (camera-recorder, menu screens, etc.) in these operating instructions differ slightly from the
actual camera-recorder.
References
• References are shown as (Page 00).
Terminology
• Both SD Memory Cards and SDHC Memory Cards as referred to as “SD Memory Cards” in these operating
instructions.
• Memory cards that have the “P2” logo (e.g., AJ-P2C064AG, an optional accessory) are referred to as “P2
cards” in these operating instructions.
• Video that is created during a single recording operation is referred to as a “clip” in these operating
instructions.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Precautions for Use
Caution regarding laser beams
TheꢁMOSꢁsensorꢁmayꢁbeꢁdamagedꢁifꢁitꢁisꢁexposedꢁtoꢁlaserꢁlight.
Whenꢁusingꢁtheꢁcamera-recorderꢁinꢁlocationsꢁwhereꢁlaserꢁirradiationꢁequipmentꢁisꢁused,ꢁbeꢁcarefulꢁnotꢁtoꢁallowꢁtheꢁlaserꢁ
beamꢁtoꢁshineꢁdirectlyꢁonꢁtheꢁlens.
PLEASE NOTE:
ꢁ ꢁWhenꢁpreparingꢁtoꢁrecordꢁimportantꢁevents,ꢁalwaysꢁshootꢁsomeꢁadvanceꢁtestꢁfootage,ꢁtoꢁverifyꢁthatꢁbothꢁpicturesꢁandꢁ
soundꢁareꢁbeingꢁrecordedꢁnormally.
ꢁ ꢁShouldꢁvideoꢁorꢁaudioꢁrecordingꢁfailꢁdueꢁtoꢁaꢁmalfunctionꢁofꢁthisꢁcamera-recorderꢁorꢁtheꢁPꢀꢁcardsꢁused,ꢁweꢁwillꢁnotꢁ
assumeꢁliabilityꢁforꢁsuchꢁfailure.
Disposing and transferring ownership of memory card devices
FormattingꢁorꢁdeletingꢁaꢁmemoryꢁcardꢁdeviceꢁinꢁthisꢁcameraꢁorꢁaꢁPCꢁwillꢁonlyꢁchangeꢁfileꢁmanagementꢁdataꢁandꢁleaveꢁ
dataꢁonꢁtheꢁcardꢁintact.ꢁItꢁisꢁrecommendedꢁthatꢁtheꢁcardꢁeitherꢁbeꢁphysicallyꢁdestroyedꢁorꢁthatꢁcommerciallyꢁsoldꢁsoftwareꢁ
beꢁusedꢁtoꢁcompletelyꢁdeleteꢁanyꢁdataꢁonꢁtheꢁcard.ꢁNoteꢁthatꢁmanagingꢁcardꢁdataꢁisꢁtheꢁowner’sꢁresponsibility.
Information on software for this product
1.ꢁ ꢁIncludedꢁwithꢁthisꢁproductꢁisꢁsoftwareꢁlicensedꢁunderꢁtheꢁGNUꢁGeneralꢁPublicꢁLicenseꢁ(GPL)ꢁandꢁGNUꢁLesserꢁ
GeneralꢁPublicꢁLicenseꢁ(LGPL),ꢁandꢁusersꢁareꢁherebyꢁinformedꢁthatꢁtheyꢁhaveꢁtheꢁrightꢁtoꢁobtain,ꢁchangeꢁandꢁ
redistributeꢁtheꢁsourceꢁcodesꢁofꢁthisꢁsoftware.
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
Toꢁobtainꢁtheꢁsourceꢁcodes,ꢁgoꢁtoꢁtheꢁfollowingꢁhomeꢁpage:
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/
Theꢁmanufacturerꢁasksꢁusersꢁtoꢁrefrainꢁfromꢁdirectingꢁinquiriesꢁconcerningꢁtheꢁsourceꢁcodesꢁtheyꢁhaveꢁobtainedꢁandꢁ
otherꢁdetailsꢁtoꢁitsꢁrepresentatives.
ꢀ.ꢁ ꢁIncludedꢁwithꢁthisꢁproductꢁisꢁsoftwareꢁwhichꢁisꢁlicensedꢁunderꢁMIT-License.
DetailsꢁcanꢁbeꢁfoundꢁonꢁtheꢁinstallationꢁCDꢁprovidedꢁwithꢁtheꢁunit.ꢁReferꢁtoꢁtheꢁfolderꢁcalledꢁ“LDOC”.ꢁ(Detailsꢁareꢁgivenꢁinꢁ
theꢁoriginalꢁ(English-language)ꢁtext.)
1
P2HD 5 Year Warranty Repair Program
*
Thank you for purchasing this Panasonic P2HD device.
Register as a user for this device to receive a special service warranty up to five years of free warranty repairs.
Customers who register as users on the website will receive an extended warranty repair valid for up to
five years.
5
1st year
2nd year
3rd year
Extended warranty repair
*
4th year
5th year
*
2
3
4
P2HD device
Basic warranty
*
*
1: Please note that this extended warranty is not available in some countries/regions. 2: Not all models eligible for extended warranty
*
*
coverage. 3: The basic warranty period may vary depending on the country/region. 4: Not all repair work is covered by this extended
*
*
warranty. 5: The maximum warranty period may be adjusted depending on the number of hours the device has been used.
*
Free 5 years of Warranty Repairs
Make sure to save the “Registration Notice” e-mail
during the warranty period.
Purchase
P2 product
Register online
within 1 month
“Registration Notice”
e-mail sent
Details about user registration and the extended warranty: http://panasonic.biz/sav/pass_e
Please note, this is a site that is not maintained by Panasonic Canada Inc. The Panasonic Canada Inc. privacy policy does not apply and is not applicable in relation to any
information submitted. This link is provided to you for convenience.
ꢂ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Read this first! ................................................................................................................. 2
Precautions for Use ......................................................................................................... 6
Chapter 1 Overview
Camera Unit Features ................................................................................................... 11
Recording and Playback Features ............................................................................... 12
Setting for Your Area (Color TV Standard Setting) ........................................................ 13
System Configuration .................................................................................................... 14
Standard Accessories ................................................................................................... 15
Chapter 2 Parts and Their Functions
Power Supply and Accessory Mounting Section .................................................. 16
Audio (input) Function Section .............................................................................. 17
Audio (output) Function Section ........................................................................... 18
Shooting and Recording/Playback Functions Section .......................................... 19
Menu/Thumbnail Operation Section ..................................................................... 24
Time Code Section ................................................................................................ 25
Warning and Status Display Functions ................................................................. 26
LCD Monitor .......................................................................................................... 26
Viewfinder ............................................................................................................. 27
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback
Setting Date and Time of Internal Clock ....................................................................... 28
P2 Cards ....................................................................................................................... 30
Inserting P2 Cards ................................................................................................ 30
Removing P2 Cards .............................................................................................. 30
To Prevent Accidental Erasure of P2 Card Content .............................................. 31
P2 Card Access LED and Status of P2 Cards ...................................................... 31
P2 Card Recording Times ..................................................................................... 32
Handling P2 Card Recording ................................................................................ 32
Basic Procedures .......................................................................................................... 33
Shooting ................................................................................................................ 34
Normal Recording ................................................................................................. 34
2D LL Recording ................................................................................................... 35
Native Recording .......................................................................................................... 36
Variable Frame Rate (VFR) Recording .......................................................................... 37
Native VFR Recording ........................................................................................... 37
Standard VFR Recording(pulldown recording) ..................................................... 37
Using VFR Recording Function ............................................................................. 38
Special Recording Modes ............................................................................................ 40
Interval Recording (INTERVAL REC) ..................................................................... 40
REC CHECK Function ........................................................................................... 41
Shot Marker (SHOT MARK) Recording Function .................................................. 41
Normal and Variable Speed Playback .......................................................................... 42
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording
Selecting Recording Signals ................................................................................. 43
List of Recording Formats and Functions ............................................................. 43
Selecting Video Output ......................................................................................... 44
List of Recording, Playback and Output Formats ................................................. 45
Adjusting the White Balance and Black Balance ......................................................... 46
Adjusting the White Balance ................................................................................. 46
Adjusting the Black Balance ................................................................................. 47
Setting the Electronic Shutter ........................................................................................ 48
Setting the Shutter Mode and Speed .................................................................... 48
Placing the Camera-recorder in SYNCHRO SCAN Mode .................................... 49
Assigning Functions to USER Buttons .......................................................................... 50
Selecting Audio Input Signals and Adjusting Recording Levels .................................. 51
Selecting Audio Input Signals ............................................................................... 51
Adjusting Recording Levels .................................................................................. 51
Selecting Function for the F. AUDIO LEVEL Control ............................................. 52
CH3 and CH4 Recording Levels .......................................................................... 52
Adjustments and Settings for 3D Recording ................................................................ 53
Switching the LCD Monitor/Viewfinder Screen ..................................................... 53
Setting 3D Recording Mode ................................................................................. 53
Adjusting the Convergence Point ......................................................................... 54
3D Assist Function ................................................................................................ 56
Adjustment between Two Lenses (3D FINE Function) .......................................... 57
ꢃ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Time Data .......................................................................................................... 59
Recording Time Codes and User Bits .................................................................. 60
Setting User Bits ................................................................................................... 61
Entering the User Bits ........................................................................................... 61
Setting the Time Code .......................................................................................... 63
Externally Locking the Time Code ........................................................................ 65
Counter Setting and Display ................................................................................. 66
LCD Monitor/Viewfinder Screen Status Displays .......................................................... 67
Status Indication Layout ........................................................................................ 67
Selecting Display Information ............................................................................... 67
Screen Displays .................................................................................................... 68
Center Information Display ................................................................................... 70
Checking and Displaying Shooting Status ........................................................... 72
MODE CHECK Indication ..................................................................................... 73
Center Marker Display .......................................................................................... 74
Safety Zone Markers ............................................................................................. 74
Zebra Pattern Display ........................................................................................... 74
Focus Assist Function ........................................................................................... 75
Waveform Monitor Function .................................................................................. 75
Adjusting and Setting the LCD Monitor/Viewfinder ....................................................... 76
Using the LCD monitor .......................................................................................... 76
Adjusting Left and Right Viewfinder Positions ...................................................... 77
Diopter Adjustment ............................................................................................... 77
Emphasizing Image Outlines ................................................................................ 77
Handling Setup Data ..................................................................................................... 78
Configuration of Setup Data Files ......................................................................... 78
Handling SD Memory Cards ................................................................................. 79
Formatting, Writing and Reading an SD Memory Card ........................................ 79
How to Use Scene File Data ................................................................................. 80
Saving Scene Files and Other Settings on SD Memory Cards ............................. 82
Chapter 5 Preparation
Power Supply ................................................................................................................ 84
Mounting the Battery and Setting the Battery Type .............................................. 84
Use of the External DC Power Supply .................................................................. 85
Preparing for Audio Input .............................................................................................. 87
When Using the Front Microphone ....................................................................... 87
Using a Wireless Receiver .................................................................................... 88
When Using Audio Devices .................................................................................. 88
Attaching/Adjusting Accessories .................................................................................. 89
Mounting the Camera on a Tripod ........................................................................ 89
Attaching the Shoulder Strap ................................................................................ 89
Adjusting the Grip Belt .......................................................................................... 89
DC OUT Connector and External REC Start/Stop Switch Connection ......................... 90
Chapter 6 Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails
Thumbnail Operations ................................................................................................... 91
Thumbnail Manipulations Overview ...................................................................... 91
Thumbnail Screen ................................................................................................. 92
Selecting Thumbnails ............................................................................................ 93
Playing back Clips ................................................................................................ 94
Switching the Thumbnail Display .......................................................................... 94
Shot Mark .............................................................................................................. 95
Deleting Clips ........................................................................................................ 96
Restoring Clips ...................................................................................................... 96
Setting of Clip Meta Data ...................................................................................... 97
Formatting a P2 Card .......................................................................................... 100
Formatting SD Memory Cards ............................................................................ 100
Setting the Thumbnail Display Mode .................................................................. 101
Properties ............................................................................................................ 102
Saving the Log Data ........................................................................................... 105
ꢄ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 Menu Operations
LCD Monitor/Viewfinder Menus .................................................................................. 106
Using the Menus ................................................................................................. 106
Initializing the Menu Settings .............................................................................. 107
Setup Menu Structure ................................................................................................. 108
Setup Menu List .......................................................................................................... 110
SCENE FILE Screen ............................................................................................ 110
SYSTEM SETUP Screen ...................................................................................... 111
SW MODE Screen ............................................................................................... 113
RECORDING SETUP Screen .............................................................................. 113
AUDIO SETUP Screen ........................................................................................ 114
OUTPUT SEL Screen .......................................................................................... 116
DISPLAY SETUP Screen ..................................................................................... 116
BATTERY SETUP Screen ..................................................................................... 117
CARD FUNCTIONS Screen ................................................................................ 118
3D ASSIST Screen .............................................................................................. 119
OTHER FUNCTIONS Screen .............................................................................. 119
DIAGNOSTIC Screen .......................................................................................... 120
OPTION MENU Screen ....................................................................................... 120
Chapter 8 Connecting to External Devices
Connecting the AJ-RC10G Remote Control Unit ........................................................ 121
Connecting the AG-EC4G Extension Control Unit ...................................................... 122
Adjusting the Convergence Point ....................................................................... 122
Chapter 9 Maintenance and Inspections
Inspections Before Shooting ....................................................................................... 123
Preparing for Inspections .................................................................................... 123
Inspecting the Camera Unit ................................................................................ 123
Inspecting the Memory Recording Functions ..................................................... 124
Maintenance ............................................................................................................... 126
Cleaning Inside the Viewfinder ........................................................................... 126
Charging the Internal Battery .............................................................................. 126
Warning System .......................................................................................................... 127
Warning Description Tables ................................................................................ 127
Warning and Error Display for Thumbnail Operation .......................................... 130
Updating the Firmware Incorporated into the Unit ..................................................... 131
Chapter 10 Index
Chapter 11 Specifications
Dimensions and specifications ................................................................................... 135
Dimensions ......................................................................................................... 135
Specifications ...................................................................................................... 135
Connector Signal Description ..................................................................................... 138
ꢅ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Overview
Attention
Perform the following settings before using the unit for the first time.
• The unit is delivered from the factory with the settings not yet specified for your area. Revise the settings for the TV
standard of your area, etc., following the procedures described on page 13.
The AG-3DP1 P2 memory card camera-recorder features a camera unit equipped with two lenses and a 1/3-type 2.2-
megapixel 3MOS sensor, and a recording and playback unit that provides AVC-Intra 100 compression recording as
standard to provide HD full pixel and full sampling for high sensitivity, superb image quality, and high-quality video.
The P2 card provides reliability, speed, and IT functionality that no other media can match, and it is destined to
revolutionize workflow for production of 3D programs, from shooting to editing.
Secure and comfortable 3D recording
The camera is provided with the 3D assist function. It enables you to check by colors on the LCD monitor screen the
convergence point area and any excessive pop-out and/or receded area generated by parallax and to adjust the
parallax appropriately. The effects of the 3D assist function can be output to the viewfinder and an external monitor.
The camera also features auto iris, auto focus, and manually selectable ND filters, for easy shooting.
3D image and convergence point
When shooting
When viewing a 3D image
Convergence point
3D glasses
• The illustration above is an image for explanation.
The convergence point is a point where the optical axes of the left and right lenses converge. This indicates the
reference plane when viewing a 3D image.
When shooting, adjust the convergence point by shooting the subject you want to set on the reference plane so
that the image of the subject from the left lens is completely superimposed onto that from the right lens.
When viewing the 3D image, a subject located closer than the convergence point is displayed in front of the
screen, and a subject located farther than the convergence point is displayed behind the screen.
High quality and high sensitivity
The camera uses an AVC-Intra codec (MPEG-4 AVC/H.264), which provides high reliability for broadcasting equipment.
A 1/3-type 2.2-megapixel 3MOS sensor enables high-sensitivity HD full pixel recording for high-resolution video.
The camera also enables high-quality and uncompressed, 16-bit, 48-kHz, 4-channel recording of audio.
Wide zoom range
The camera is equipped newly developed HD lenses (left and right) that enable wide to 17.0 × optical zooming. It
expands the capability of supporting a wide range of applications
Multi-camera recording supported
The camera features GENLOCK input and TC input, to allow simultaneous recording from multiple connected cameras.
This makes multi-camera live recording and multi-camera editing with this unit easy and convenient.
2D LL recording mode supported
The camera supports 2D LL recording mode, for recording the left-lens (L) image on the left and right P2 cards
simulatneously. With this function you can record images with no parallax difference or make a backup copy, which is
made easy and convenient by use of two card slots.
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Camera Unit Features
Variable frame rate makes speed effects possible (in the 720P format)
The AG-3DP1 comes with the variable frame rate feature developed for the VariCam HD Cinema camera. In 720P
1
*
mode , the frame rate can be set to any of 20 steps between 12P and 60P (50P). This puts features such as
undercranking (dropping frames) and overcranking (high frame rate) for quick motion and slow motion cine-like effects
at the disposal of the camera crew.
Native mode
Playing back a recording made at a frame rate set in the camera at the normal rate provides speed effects without
using a frame rate converter. Native mode also extends the recording time of a P2 card. (720P)
14-bit digital circuit
The high-performance DSP (Digital Signal Processor) in the camera offers 14-bit signal input and 20-bit internal
processing. It handles gamma settings and other adjustments for each R/G/B color in 1080/60i (50i) video as well as
conversion to all HD/SD formats (P/I conversion, line conversion and down conversion). Because of this high-quality
images can be produced in all video formats.
Six gamma curves including cine-like gamma
To expand camera capabilities, the AG-3DP1 offers six gamma curves including cine-like gamma to easily produce
recordings with the characteristic warm tone of film.
Slow, synchro and high speed shutter
The shutter speed can be set from a slow speed of 1/12 s up to a maximum speed of 1/250 s. Combined with the
variable frame rate functions, this allows you to create blurring or stop motion effects. The AG-3DP1 also features a
synchro scan function that is ideal for capturing screen shots from a computer monitor.
Scene files
Six preset files are provided, and you can change the file names and their settings as desired. You can also save up
to four files to an SD or SDHC memory card (both referred to as “SD memory card” below) and load files from an SD
memory card.
Shooting assist functions
ꢁ ꢁUSERꢁbuttons:
Three USER buttons each of which can be assigned a frequently used function for immediate access.
ꢁ ꢁFocusꢁassist:
Magnifies the center portion of the image and displays a focus bar to facilitate focusing.
ꢁ ꢁVariableꢁcolorꢁtemperature:
Allows fine adjustment after setting the white balance.
ꢁ ꢁRECꢁCHECK:
Provides a quick check of the last few seconds of the most recently recorded clip.
ꢁ ꢁ4-positionꢁopticalꢁNDꢁfilterꢁprovided.
Remote control support
This camera supports the AJ-RC10G remote control unit (optional accessory) and the AG-EC4G extension control unit
(optional accessory). The remote control allows you to adjust camera image and recording controls at a distance while
viewing what you are shooting.
Camera extension system support
This camera can be connected to the AG-CA300G camera adapter (optional accessory) and the AG-BS300 base
station (optional accessory) to enable camera extension system recording. For details on connections to these devices,
refer to the connection instructions and precautions found in the instruction manuals for the AG-CA300G and AG-
BS300, and observe the instructions for the AG-HPX300P/AG-HPX301E.
1
*
1080 recording is performed at a fixed frame rate of 24P/30P (25P).
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording and Playback Features
P2 cards for high capacity, high speed and high reliability
In addition to exceptional resistance to shock, vibration and temperature fluctuations, the P2 (Professional Plug-in) card
has a reliability that guarantees long-term repeated recording/initialization that a tape or hard disk system with their
moving parts could never match.
The connectors are professional grade to withstand long-term continual insertion and removal.
The P2 card stores the AV data for each shooting session as a single file that is immediately accessible for nonlinear
editing or transfer over a network without digitizing. Transfer speeds far surpassing those of optical disks also help to
speed up production processes. The P2 card complies with PC card standards and can be directly plugged into the PC
1
*
card slot on a computer.
Immediate startup and reliable data protection
When you press the REC button in standby mode, the camera instantly finds a blank area on the P2 card and begins
recording. Unlike a VTR system, there is no need to locate a blank section before recording. In normal use, there is
no chance of accidentally deleting a recording. Recordings will not be erased unless you intentionally delete a file or
initialize the card.
Interval REC
Recording one frame at a time at set intervals (from 2 frames to 10 minutes), this mode is useful for monitoring,
supervision and special ultra undercranking effects.
Clip thumbnail preview
The camera records each cut as a clip (file) and automatically attaches a thumbnail image and file information to it. To
preview a clip on the LCD monitor or to check clip data, simply choose the clip you want from the list of thumbnails.
2
*
These thumbnails and the file data can be viewed on a PC (P2 Viewer ) or processed in a nonlinear editing program.
Shot marker
If desired, you can add a simple OK/reject shot marker to each clip either during or after recording. When a P2 card is
mounted in a PC (P2 Viewer), the PC will display only marked clips.
SD memory card slot
The camera provides an SD memory card slot for saving and loading scene files and user settings. A metadata upload file
(created using P2 Viewer) containing the name of the person who shot the video, the name of the reporter, the shooting
location, and other information can be saved to an SD memory card. This data file can be loaded as clip metadata.
Fine adjustment of sound recording level
The camera features a front-mounted control for fine adjustment of the sound recording level. This control is particularly
useful for adjusting the sound level when you have to control both video and audio recording. The control can be disabled.
Unislot wireless receiver compatible
The AG-3DP1 is designed to work with optional slot wireless receivers.
The camera supports 2-channel wireless receivers.
1
This requires the installation of a P2 card driver (provided with each device). For details on the system requirements of
*
the P2 card driver, visit the support desk at the following website.
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/
“P2 Viewer” is a Windows® PC viewing software that can be downloaded free of charge by P2 card users.
2
*
1ꢀ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting for Your Area (Color TV Standard Setting)
This unit is delivered with the area setting, such as the color TV standard, not yet specified. To revise the settings, perform
the following steps:
ꢁ
Afterꢁconnectingꢁtheꢁunitꢁtoꢁtheꢁpowerꢁsupplyꢁ
thenꢁturningꢁonꢁtheꢁpower,ꢁholdꢁdownꢁtheꢁ
DISP/MODEꢁCHKꢁbuttonꢁandꢁpressꢁtheꢁMENUꢁ
button.
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
TurnꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁselectꢁSETꢁthenꢁ
pressꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbutton.
1
5
6
7
OPTION MENU
AREA SELECT
NTSC
>>>
SET
MAIN MENU
9.CARD FUNCTIONS
10.3D ASSIST
11.OTHER FUNCTIONS
12.DIAGNOSTIC
13.OPTION MENU
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
PUSH MENU TO EXIT
SelectꢁEXECUTEꢁthenꢁpressꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁ
button.
ꢁ
ꢁ
CheckꢁthatꢁOPTIONꢁMENUꢁisꢁselectedꢁthenꢁ
pressꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbutton.
2
OPTION MENU
AREA SELECT
NTSC
RETURN
EXECUTE
SET
The OPTION MENU screen opens.
TurnꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁmoveꢁtheꢁcursorꢁtoꢁ
theꢁAREAꢁSELECTꢁitemꢁthenꢁpressꢁtheꢁJOGꢁ
dialꢁbutton.
3
For details on menu operations, refer to [Using the
Menus] (page 106).
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
OPTION MENU
AREA SELECT
NTSC
>>>
TurnꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁselectꢁYESꢁthenꢁ
pressꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbutton.
SET
AREA SETTING
INIT NTSC SETTING
ARE YOU SURE ?
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
YES
NO
PUSH SET
ꢁ
4
TurnꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁselectꢁtheꢁcolorꢁ
TVꢁstandardꢁofꢁyourꢁarea,ꢁNTSCꢁorꢁPAL,ꢁthenꢁ
pressꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbutton.
The message “TURN POWER OFF” appears on the
screen.
OPTION MENU
AREA SELECT
NTSC
PAL
SET
ꢁ
8
Turnꢁtheꢁpowerꢁoffꢁandꢁthenꢁturnꢁitꢁbackꢁonꢁ
again.
• The setting selected in step 4 is reflected in
factory defaults and current operating status
values.
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you perform this setting when using the unit for the first time, only the settings of the following five options are changed,
leaving the other factory settings unchanged.
If you perform it after making various adjustments with the setup menu or thumbnail menu, all options other than the
following five options return to their factory settings.
Setup menu option
SYSTEM MODE
REC FORMAT
TC MODE
Factory settings
1080-59.94i
AVC-I 100/60i
DF
NTSC
PAL
1080-59.94i
AVC-I 100/60i
DF
1080-50i
AVC-I 100/50i
Not displayed
18 dB
HEADROOM
20 dB
20 dB
DATE FORMAT
M-D-Y
M-D-Y
D-M-Y
(Thumbnail menu)
System Configuration
3
*
Remote control unit
Viewfinder
AJ-RC10G
AJ-CVF100G
AJ-HVF21KG
Remote control cable
AJ-C10050G
Shotgun microphone
(Phantom +48V)
Extension control unit
AJ-MC900G
AG-EC4G
1
*
Battery
AG-3DP1
HYTRON140
DIONIC90/160
Tripod adapter
SHAN-TM700
V-mount
type
battery
plate
ENDURA 10
External power supply
LCD monitor
2
SD Memory cards
*
2
P2 cards
*
Unislot wireless
microphone receiver
1 The camera is equipped with a battery holder as standard.
2 For the latest information on P2 cards and SD memory cards not available in the Operating Instructions, visit the support
desk at the following website.
*
*
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/
3 For details, refer to the AJ-RC10G Operating Guide on the supplied CD-ROM.
*
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Standard Accessories
Shoulder belt
Microphone holder
CD-ROM
ꢁꢁ
ꢁꢁ
ꢁꢁ
For details, refer to
[Attaching the Shoulder
Strap] (page 89).
For details, refer to [When
Using the Front Microphone] • Utility Software
(page 87).
• Operating Instructions
*
For how to install the Utility Software, refer to the Installation Manual included in the CD-ROM.
*ꢁ
The following accessories are attached to the unit.
Lens cap
XLR connector cap
BNC cap
NOTE
• Be sure to appropriately dispose of the packing material when you have unpacked the product.
• Consult your supplier regarding purchases of accessories.
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Parts and Their Functions
Power Supply and Accessory Mounting Section
9
14 11 3 2
10 11 8 7 6
1 13
4 5
12
1
2
POWER switch
Use to turn the power on and off.
9
Light switch
Use to select how to turn on/off the video light
connected to the Light connector.
Battery holder
AUTO:
Keep the POWER switch on the video light
ON, so that the video light turns on when the
camera starts recording and turns off when
the camera stops recording.
An Anton/Bauer battery is mounted here.
For details, refer to [Mounting the Battery and Setting
the Battery Type] (page 84).
MANUAL: The video light is turned on/off with the
3
4
Battery release lever
Pull down the release lever to release the battery.
POWER switch of the light.
10 Light connector
DC IN (external power input) socket (XLR, 4P)
Connect this camera to an external DC power supply.
For details, refer to [Use of the External DC Power
Supply] (page 85).
You can connect an Anton/Bauer Ultralight 2 or
equivalent product under 50 W for the video light.
When the light is lit, the battery charge level goes down
sharply. When using the light, we recommend using a
battery above 90 Wh.
5
6
DC OUT (DC power supply) output socket
This is a 12 V DC output socket that provides a
maximum current of 1.5 A.
11 Shoulder strap fittings
The shoulder strap is attached here.
For details, refer to [Attaching the Shoulder Strap]
(page 89).
NOTE
Be sure to check polarity before connecting an external
device as incorrect connection could lead to damage.
12 Microphone cable clamp
VF connector (20-pin)
This clamp secures the microphone cables.
Installs the viewfinder (AJ-CVF100G/AJ-HVF21KG,
optional).
Refer to [Viewfinder] (page 27).
13 Tripod mount
To mount the camera on a tripod, attach the optional
tripod adapter (SHAN-TM700) here.
For details, refer to [Mounting the Camera on a Tripod]
(page 89).
7
8
Viewfinder left-right positioning ring
Light shoe
A video light or similar accessory can be attached here.
(Size of holes for securing screws)
• 1/4-20UNC (6 mm or shorter screws)
14 Accessory mounting hole
Accessories can be attached here. Do not use this hole
for purposes other than attaching accessories.
(Size of holes for securing screws)
• 1/4-20UNC (10 mm or shorter screws)
• 3/8-16UNC (10 mm or shorter screws)
1ꢂ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Audio (input) Function Section
7
2 8
4
3
1
5
6
1
MIC IN (front microphone input) +48V jack (XLR, 5-
pin)
NOTE
To record 2-channel wireless input, switch both CH1 and
CH2 to W.L. position and set the menu option WIRELESS
TYPE in the AUDIO SETUP screen to DUAL.
Connect a microphone (optional accessory) to this jack.
A phantom-powered microphone may be connected.
To use a phantom-powered microphone, set the menu
option F.MIC POWER to ON in the AUDIO SETUP
screen.
5
6
AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 (audio channel 1/2) connectors
(XLR, 3-pin)
Audio devices or microphones may be connected here.
For details, refer to [When Using Audio Devices]
(page 88).
For details, refer to [Preparing for Audio Input]
(page 87).
LINE/MIC (line input/mic input) selector switch and
+48V switch
Use to select audio signals to be input to the AUDIO IN
CH1/CH2 connectors.
2
3
4
AUDIO LEVEL CH1/CH2 (audio channel 1/2
recording level adjustment) controls
With the AUDIO SELECT CH1/CH2 switch positioned
to MAN, these controls can be used to adjust the
recording levels for audio channels 1 and 2.
Note that the controls are designed to be locked. For
adjustment, each control must be depressed while
turning.
LINE:
Line input for audio signals input from an
audio device
MIC:
Audio signal input from a microphone input
The +48V switch turns the internal power supply to a
phantom microphone on/off.
AUDIO SELECT CH1/CH2 (audio channel 1/2
automatic/manual level adjustment selector) switch
Use this switch to select recording level control mode
for audio channels 1 and 2.
+ 48V:
Supplies power to the microphone.
OFF:
Does not supply power the microphone.
NOTE
AUTO:
MAN:
Recording level automatically controlled.
Recording level manually controlled.
Power is supplied to the microphone when the menu
option R.MIC POWER in the AUDIO SETUP screen is set to
ON.
For details, refer to [Adjusting Recording Levels]
(page 51).
7
F. AUDIO LEVEL (front audio recording level
adjustment) control
This control adjusts the recording level of audio
channels 1 and 2.
With the AUDIO SELECT CH1/CH2 switch positioned to
MAN, this control can be used to adjust the recording
levels for audio channels 1 and 2.
AUDIO IN (audio input selector) switch
Use this switch to select signals recorded through
audio channels 1 – 4.
FRONT: Records signals from a microphone
connected to the MIC IN jack.
W.L.(WIRELESS):
Use the menu options FRONT VR CH1 and FRONT VR
CH2 in the AUDIO SETUP screen to select the input
connector this control will be used for.
Records signals from a wireless receiver.
REAR:
Records signals from audio devices or
microphones connected to the AUDIO IN
CH1/CH2 connectors.
8
Wireless slot
A Unislot wireless receiver (optional accessory) may be
attached here.
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Audio (output) Function Section
2
4
5
1 3
5
1
MONITOR SELECT (audio channel) CH1/2, CH3/4
selector switch
4
Speaker
The speaker outputs EE sound during recording and
reproduced sound during playback. The speaker emits
an alarm sound when the WARNING lamp and indicator
light or blink. EE sound and reproduced sound are not
output during alarm sound output.
Use this switch to select the audio channel whose
signals are output to the speaker or earphones.
CH1/2:
Signal output of audio channels 1 and 2.
Signal output of audio channels 3 and 4.
CH3/4:
The channel indications of the audio level meters on the
LCD monitor and in the viewfinder show the channels
selected with this switch.
When earphones are connected to the PHONES
connector, the sound from the speaker is automatically
muted.
2
MONITOR SELECT (audio selection) CH1/3, ST,
CH2/4 selector switch
This switch and the MONITOR SELECT CH1/2, CH3/4
switch select the audio signal output to the speaker or
earphones.
5
PHONES (earphones) jack (mini jack)
This connector is designed for audio monitoring (stereo)
earphones.
MONITOR SELECT switch (lower)
MONITOR SELECT
switch (upper)
CH1/2
CH3/4
CH1/3 Audio Channel 1
Stereo signals
Audio Channel 3
Stereo signals
from Audio
MONITOR
SELECT
ST
from Audio
Channels 1 and 2 Channels 3 and 4
1
1
*
*
CH2/4 Audio Channel 2
Audio Channel 4
1
*
MIX in the menu option MONITOR SELECT in the
AUDIO SETUP screen allows you to change stereo
signals to a mixed signal.
3
MONITOR (volume) control
Use to control the alarm sound volume and volume of
sound output from the monitor speaker and earphones.
1ꢄ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shooting and Recording/Playback Functions Section
4 5 6
16 17 18
1 2 3
19
㻯㻭㻹㻱㻾㻭 㻾㻱㻹㻻㼀㻱
㻲㻻㻯㼁㻿㻌㻌㻵㻾㻵㻿
㻯㻻㻺㼂㻚
㼆㻻㻻㻹㻛㻿㻛㻿
7 8 9 10 1112 13 14 15
Shooting and Recording (camera unit)
Setting
Description
Does not use the ND filter.
Reduces the amount of light
entering the MOS sensor to 1/4.
Reduces the amount of light
entering the MOS sensor to 1/16.
Reduces the amount of light
entering the MOS sensor to 1/64.
1
CLEAR
1
2
3
4
Focus ring
Use this using to adjust the focus manually.
2
1/4
1/16
1/64
Zoom ring
Use this using to adjust the zoom manually.
3
Iris ring
4
Use this using to adjust the lens iris manually.
ZOOM lever
Use this lever to perform zoom operations.
9
SHUTTER switch
Use this switch to turn the electronic shutter on and off.
T:
Zoom in
OFF:
ON:
SEL:
The electronic shutter is off.
The electronic shutter is on.
Changes the speed of the electronic shutter.
W:
Zoom out
Press the lever lightly to change the zoom slowly, and
hard to change it quickly.
This dial switch returns to its original position when
released. Each push in the SEL direction changes the
shutter speed.
5
IRIS selector switch
Use this switch to select the lens iris adjustment mode.
M:
Manual iris mode
To adjust the iris, turn the iris ring on the lens.
Auto iris mode
For details, refer to [Setting the Electronic Shutter]
(page 48).
W:
10 AUTO W/B (white/black) BAL switch
AWB: Automatically adjusts the white balance.
The lens iris is adjusted automatically.
6
7
IRIS (PUSH AUTO) button
Press this button in manual iris mode. The lens iris is
adjusted automatically while you hold down the button.
Set the WHITE BAL switch on the side to A
or B and use this switch to adjust the white
balance, which takes a few seconds. The
adjusted value is stored in memory.
When the WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST
and the AUTO W/B BAL switch is set to AWB
to indicate the color temperature, pushing
the AUTO W/B BAL switch towards AWB a
second time allows you to change the preset
color temperature.
CONV. (convergence) dial
Use this dial to adjust the convergence point (depth of
the reference place for the 3D image).
For details, refer to [Adjusting the Convergence Point]
(page 54).
NOTE
ABB:
Automatically adjusts the black balance.
Lens operations such as iris, zoom, focus, and
convergence adjustments cannot be performed during
synchronization with the GENLOCK input signal.
For details, refer to [Adjusting the White Balance and
Black Balance] (page 46).
8
ND FILTER (filter switching) selector button (
)
Use this button to adjust the amount of light entering the
MOS sensor during shooting in strong outdoor lighting.
1ꢅ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11 FOCUS selector switch
15 USER MAIN, USER1 and USER2 buttons
These buttons can be assigned user-selected functions
in a setting menu. Each button, when pressed,
performs the assigned function.
Use this switch to select the focus adjustment mode.
A (AUTO):
M (MANUAL): Manual focus mode
Focus on infinity
Auto focus mode
:
For details, refer to [Assigning Functions to USER
Buttons] (page 50).
12 GAIN selector switch
This switch adjusts video amplifier gain to suit ambient
lighting conditions at the time of shooting.
Use the menu options LOW GAIN, MID GAIN and HIGH
GAIN in the SW MODE screen to set the L/M/H position
gain values.
16 SYNCHRO SCAN switches
This function adjusts the synchro scan speed when
the SHUTTER switch is set to ON and synchro scan is
selected.
Pressing the – switch sets a slower shutter speed and
pressing the + switch sets a faster one.
For example, to record a computer screen, make
adjustments to minimize horizontal bar noise in the
viewfinder.
In VFR (Variable Frame Rate) mode, press the JOG dial
button and this switch to change the frame rate.
For details, refer to [2. JOG dial button] in [Menu/
Thumbnail Operation Section] (page 24).
The factory settings for L, M and H positions are 0 dB, 6
dB and 12 dB, respectively.
13 OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE selector switch
This switch selects the video signals sent from
the camera unit to the memory card recorder unit,
viewfinder and video monitor.
CAM. ON:
Video being recorded through the camera is
output with the Auto knee circuit activated.
CAM. OFF:
17 DISP/MODE CHK button
Press this button to turn off the display on the LCD
monitor and in the viewfinder. (The time code indication
stays on.)
A second press of the button turns the display back on
and holding it down displays shooting conditions and
functions assigned to USER buttons.
Video being recorded through the camera is
output with the Auto knee circuit turned off.
The KNEE point is locked to the level set in
the menu.
BARS:
Color bar signals are output with the AUTO
KNEE circuit turned off.
It also serves to turn off the alarm sound.
18 ZEBRA (zebra pattern) button
NOTE
AUTO KNEE function
Use this button to display a zebra pattern on the LCD
monitor and in the viewfinder.
For details, refer to [Zebra Pattern Display] (page 74).
Usually, when you shoot people or scenery against a
strongly lit background and adjust the level to the subject,
the background will be totally whited-out, with buildings
and other objects blurred. Use of the AUTO KNEE function
in situations like these will reproduce the background
clearly.
19 CAMERA REMOTE jack
You can connect a remote control unit (optional) to
control camera functions.
CONV. (2.5 mm super mini jack):
Controls the convergence point adjustment
remotely.
The AUTO KNEE function is effective when:
• The subject is a person positioned in the shade under a
clear sky.
FOCUS IRIS (3.5 mm mini jack):
Controls the focus and lens iris remotely.
ZOOM S/S (2.5 mm super mini jack):
Controls zoom and start/stop of recording
remotely
• The subject is a person in a vehicle or building and you
also want to capture the background visible through a
window.
• The subject is a high-contrast scene.
14 WHITE BAL (white balance memory selector) switch
Use this switch to select method of white balance
adjustment.
NOTE
• The focus and iris adjustments on the camera are
disabled when the FOCUS IRIS remote control unit is
connected.
PRST:
Use PRST when you have no time to adjust
the white balance.
• The factory default setting is 3200 K.
• Use a setting menu or push the AUTO
W/B BAL switch towards AWB to display
the color temperature. While the color
temperature is still indicated, push the
AUTO W/B switch once again towards AWB
to switch between 3200 K and 5600 K.
Pushing the AUTO W/B BAL towards AWB
will automatically adjust the white balance
and save the adjusted value in memory A or
memory B.
• Do not connect any equipment except the remote
control unit to the remote control jack. Connecting any
equipment other than the remote control unit may cause
the image brightness to change and/or images to appear
out of focus.
• When the AJ-RC10G or AG-EC4G is connected and the
IRIS selector switch of the unit is set to A (Auto), iris
adjustment on the AJ-RC10G or AG-EC4G has priority.
A, B:
For details, refer to [Adjusting the White
Balance] (page 46).
ꢀ0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1113 12 9 10
22
2
1
15 16 17 18
14
4 5 6 7
25 24 23
19 20 21 1
3
8
5
6
gSTOP button
Press this button to stop playback.
You can also press this button to stop interval recording.
Shooting and Recording/Playback
Function Section (Recorder Unit)
1
REC button
yFF (fast forward) button
Press this button to start recording and press once
again to stop it.
The REC selector switch can be used to disable the
REC button on the handle.
In stop mode, press this button for fast playback.
During playback, press this button for fast playback at
about 4x normal speed.
If this button is pressed when playback is paused, the
beginning of the next clip is located in pause mode
(cue-up mode).
2
3
REC switch
Switches functions of the REC button on the handle.
ON:
OFF:
Enables the REC button.
Disables the REC button.
7
8
PLAY/PAUSE button
Press this button to view playback on the LCD monitor
or in the viewfinder, or on a color video monitor.
Press it during playback to pause playback.
RET/REC CHECK button
Press this button to play back the last two seconds of
the most recently recorded clip.
OUTPUT CHARACTER switch
Use this switch to control the superimposition of
character data onto HD SDI MONITOR OUT to indicate
status or setting menus.
NOTE
Only the POWER button is enabled during REC CHECK.
4
tREW (rewind) button
In stop mode, press this button for fast-reverse
playback.
During playback, press this button for fast-reverse
playback at about 4x normal speed.
If this button is pressed when playback is paused, the
beginning of the clip being played is located in pause
mode (cue-up mode).
ON:
Superimposes characters.
OFF:
Does not superimpose characters.
9
P2 card slot (L, R)
Insert the P2 card for the left image into card slot L
(upper slot), and the one for the right image into card
slot R (lower slot).
For details, refer to [Inserting P2 Cards] (page 30).
10 P2 card eject button
Raise this button and press it to remove a P2 card.
ꢀ1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11 P2 card access LED
16 3D MODE selector switch
This LED indicates the recording and playback status of
each card.
Use this button to select the 3D recording mode.
NEAR:
Near distance mode
For details, refer to [P2 Card Access LED and Status of
P2 Cards] (page 31).
This mode is used to shoot a target at a
short distance.
NORMAL: Normal mode
Normally set to this mode.
12 SD memory card slot
Insert an SD memory card (optional accessory) in this
slot. It is used for recording and loading camera setting
menus, and uploading meta data.
EXTRA:
Long distance mode
This mode is used to shoot in telephoto
mode. The variable range of zooming is
widened with this mode.
NOTE
SD memory card precautions
Refer to [Setting 3D Recording Mode] (page 53).
• Use only SD memory cards that conform to the SD
standard or the SDHC standard in this camera.
• MultiMediaCards (MMC) cannot be used. (Use of such
cards may prevent recording.)
17 LCD/EVF button
Press this button to select the style of image you wish to
appears on the LCD monitor and in the viewfinder.
Each time the button is pressed, the display changes to
NORMAL, MIX, R IMAGE, or SIDE by SIDE cyclically.
You can change the selectable images, style with the
menu option LCD/EVF in the SW MODE screen.
For details, refer to [Setting 3D Recording Mode] (page
53).
• Be sure to use miniSD/microSD card adapters when
using miniSD/microSD cards with this camera. (Note that
this camera will not operate normally when a miniSD/
microSD adapter is installed without inserting a card. Be
sure to insert a card when an adapter is installed.)
• Use of Panasonic SD memory cards and miniSD/microSD
cards is recommended. Be sure to format such cards in
this camera.
18 3D ASSIST buttons
Press the button to activate the corresponding 3D assist
function.
For details, refer to [3D Assist Function] (page 56).
Z WFM: Excessively popped-out or receded areas
are indicated by a waveform.
ALERT: Red blocks appear to indicate excessively
popped-out areas, yellow blocks to indicate
excessively receded areas.
• This camera supports SD memory cards with capacities
between 8 MB to 2 GB, and SDHC memory cards with
capacities up to 32 GB.
• For the latest information not available in the Operating
Instructions, visit the support desk at the following
website.
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/
CONV.: Green blocks appear to indicate the
convergence point area.
About SD and SDHC memory cards
• The SDHC memory card is a new standard, established
by the SD Card Association in 2006, for memory cards
with capacities of 2 GB or more.
Variable settings for the 3D assist functions are
• The SD logo is a registered trademark.
• MMC (MultiMediaCard) is a registered trademark of
Infineon Technologies AG.
available in the 3D ASSIST screen of the setting menu.
For example, the style of image to output to the LCD
monitor and in the viewfinder can be selected, the
detection range and alert level for excessive pop-out or
receding can be set, the display scale can be set, and
superimposition of the 3D assist function onto the HD
SDI MONITOR OUT output can be turned on/off.
For details, refer to [3D ASSIST Screen] (page 119).
13 BUSY (operation mode display) lamp
This lamp indicates the active status of the SD memory
card. It stays illuminated when the card is active.
NOTE
Do not remove the card while the lamp is on.
The SD memory card could be damaged.
NOTE
When the LCD/EVF mode is set to R IMAGE or SIDE by
SIDE using the LCD/EVF button, the effect of the 3D assist
function is not displayed.
14 FOCUS ASSIST button
Turns magnification of the center portion of the image
on and off.
19 GENLOCK IN connector (BNC)
This connector inputs a reference signal when the
camera unit is gen-locked, or when the time code is
externally locked.
For details, refer to [Focus Assist Function] (page 75).
15 WFM button
Press this button to display waveforms of an image on
the LCD monitor.
Each time the button is pressed, the display changes to
OFF, WAVE, or VECTOR, cyclically.
For details, refer to [Waveform Monitor Function] (page
75).
NOTE
• Supply an HDY signal (1080/59.94i (50i), 1080/23.98 PsF,
or 720/59.94P (50P)) as input reference signal.
• For the MONITOR OUT (HD SDI/HDMI) output, phase
genlock is not guaranteed.
NOTE
• The waveform display does not appear in the viewfinder.
• The waveform display does not appear when the focus
assist (EXPANDED) function is used.
• The waveform display cannot be recorded.
ꢀꢀ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
20 HD SDI OUT 1 (L) connector (BNC)
21 HD SDI OUT 2 (R) connector (BNC)
This connector outputs HD SDI signals.
When the menu option SDI OUT in the OUTPUT SEL
screen is set to ON, the HD SDI 1 (L) connector outputs
the left-lens (L) image, and the HD SDI 2 (R) connector
outputs the right-lens (R) image.
When the menu option SDI OUT in the OUTPUT SEL
screen is set to ON (SIDE), the HD SDI 1 (L) and HD
SDI 2 (R) connectors output the SIDE by SIDE image.
NOTE
For HD SDI signals, use a double-shielded BNC cable 5C-
FB or higher.
22 HDMI connector
This connector outputs HDMI signals.
To output signals from this connector, set the menu
option SDI OUT in the OUTPUT SEL screen to OFF.
You can set character superimposition for output from
HDMI with the menu option HDMI OUT CHAR in the
OUTPUT SEL screen.
NOTE
• Use HDMI cables (optional) with double shield or more.
• Use of Panasonic HDMI cables is recommended.
• The HDMI connector of this product is not compatible
with VIERA Link.
• When a VIERA-Link device is connected to this product
with an HDMI cable, VIERA Link of the connected device
may not operate properly.
23 HD SDI MONITOR OUT connector (BNC)
This connector outputs images for the monitor.
According to the menu option MON OUT SEL in the
OUTPUT SEL screen, images independent of HD SDI
OUT can be output.
You can set character superimposition for output from
HD SDI MONITOR OUTPUT with the menu option MON
OUT CHAR in the OUTPUT SEL screen.
NOTE
For HD SDI signals, use a double-shielded BNC cable 5C-
FB or higher.
24 REMOTE connector
Some functions can be remote controlled when the
remote control unit AJ-RC10G (optional accessory) is
connected to the camera.
For details, refer to [Connecting the AJ-RC10G Remote
Control Unit] (page 121).
Some functions can also be remote controlled when the
AG-EC4G extension control unit (optional accessory) is
connected.
For details, refer to [Connecting the AG-EC4G
Extension Control Unit] (page 122).
25 RETURN IN (HD SDI) connector (BNC)
This connector inputs return video signals (HD SDI
signals) to allow checking the video on the LCD monitor
and in the viewfinder.
NOTE
• For HD SDI signals, use a double-shielded BNC cable 5C-
FB or higher.
• The input signal of the RETURN IN connector can be
locked externally if the menu option GENLOCK SEL in
the OTHER FUNCTIONS screen is set to RETURN IN.
ꢀ3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu/Thumbnail Operation Section
3
7
2 1
6
5 4
1
2
MENU button
6
EXIT/CANCEL button
Hold down the button to open a setting menu screen. A
second press of the button returns the previous image.
This function is not available in the thumbnail display
and during recording.
Press this button to exit an open thumbnail menu or
property window to return to the previous image.
Pressing this button while holding down the SHIFT
button turns it into a cancel function allowing you to
cancel clip selections at one time.
JOG dial button
This button is also used for iris adjustment in 3D FINE
adjustment mode.
Use this button to go between setting menus and to
select and set items in open setting menus.
In a setting menu, turning the JOG dial button
downwards moves the menu cursor downwards and
turning it upwards moves the menu cursor upwards.
Press the JOG dial button to confirm made settings.
In VFR (Variable Frame Rate) mode, press this button
and use the SYNCHRO SCAN switch to change frame
rates.
7
SHIFT button
Use this button together with other buttons.
• Hold down the SHIFT button and press the cursor
button ([ ]) in a thumbnail screen to move the
pointer to the thumbnail at the beginning or end of a
clip.
• Hold down the SHIFT button and press the SET button
to select all clips from a previously selected clip to the
clip at the cursor location.
• SHIFT button + EXIT/CANCEL button
This button combination operates like the cancel
function.
For details, refer to [6. EXIT/CANCEL button].
Operations while the SHIFT button is pressed are
shown blow each button.
3
THUMBNAIL button
Press this button to open the thumbnail screen. Note
that this switchover cannot be performed during
recording or playback.
This button is also used for iris adjustment in 3D FINE
adjustment mode.
4
5
MENU (thumbnail menu) button
In thumbnail display mode, use this button to access
thumbnail menu functions to delete clips, for example.
This button is also used for switchover to 3D FINE
mode.
Cursor and SET buttons
Use these buttons to manipulate setting menus, the
menu bar and thumbnails.
The four triangular buttons are cursor buttons and the
square center button is the SET button.
These buttons are also used for vertical position
adjustment (VERTICAL), focus adjustment (FOCUS)
and resetting in 3D FINE adjustment mode.
NOTE
For details on the use of the buttons, refer to the following
pages:
• For menu operation, refer to [Using the Menus] (page
106).
• For thumbnail operation, refer to [Selecting Thumbnails]
(page 93).
• For 3D FINE operation, refer to [Adjustment between Two
Lenses (3D FINE Function)] (page 57).
ꢀ4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Time Code Section
4 5 6
8
7
1
3 2
1
GENLOCK IN connector (BNC)
Use this connector to input a reference signal to
genlock the camera unit or externally lock the time
code.
For details, refer to [Externally Locking the Time Code]
(page 65).
6
7
RESET button
Use this button to reset the counter value on the time
code display to 0.
Pressing this button with the TCG switch positioned
at SET when the TC PRESET screen and UB PRESET
screen are open, resets all set values to 0. Use the
Cursor SET button to PRESET.
2
3
TC IN connector (BNC)
To externally lock the time code, input a reference time
code to this connector.
For details, refer to [Externally Locking the Time Code]
(page 65).
TCG (time code selector) switch
Use this switch to set the running mode of the built-in
time code generator.
F-RUN: Select this position to continuously advance
the time code independently of P2 card
recording status. Use this position to
synchronize the time code with the time of
day, or to externally lock the time code.
TC OUT connector (BNC)
Connect this connector to the time code input (TC IN) of
the external device to lock the time code of that device
to the time code of the AG-3DP1. The signal input to the
TC IN connector is output from this connector without
delay.
SET:
Select this position to set the time code or
user bits.
R-RUN: Select this position to advance the time
code only during recording. The time code
is continuously recorded during normal
recording. But deleting clips and setting
a 24P frame rate to continue recording of
clips that are not 24P clips may break the
sequence of time code recording.
NOTE
Keep in mind that the TC OUT phase is not synchronized
when the recording format is 720P.
4
5
HOLD button
Pressing this button instantly freezes the time data
indication on the counter. Note that time code
generation continues. Pressing the button again restarts
the counter.
This function allows you to check the time code or
counter value of a recorded scene.
NOTE
Always use the cursor and SET buttons to set the time
code and user bits.The JOG dial button cannot be used for
this purpose.
COUNTER (counter display selector) button
Each press of the button displays the counter value,
time code, user bit and frame rate data on the LCD
monitor and in the viewfinder.
8
Cursor and SET buttons
Use these buttons to set the time code and user bits.
The four triangular buttons are cursor buttons and the
square center button is the SET button.
For details, refer to [Setting Time Data] (page 59).
ꢀ5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Warning and Status Display
Functions
LCD Monitor
1
2
4
1
2
3
1
LCD monitor
The LCD monitor displays the video in the viewfinder.
Alternatively, it can show clips on the P2 card in a
thumbnail format.
For details on the setting of the LCD monitor, refer to
[Adjusting and Setting the LCD Monitor/Viewfinder]
(page 76).
1
2
Back tally lamp
When the back tally switch is set to ON, this lamp
behaves in the same way as the front tally lamp.
Back tally switch
Use this switch to control the back and rear tally lamps.
In thumbnail display mode, you can use the thumbnail
menu buttons, cursor and SET buttons to manipulate or
delete clips, or format P2 cards.
For details, refer to [Manipulating Clips with
Thumbnails] (page 91).
ON:
OFF:
Enables the back and rear tally lamps.
Disables the back and rear tally lamps.
3
4
Rear tally lamp
The rear tally lamp behaves in the same way as the
back tally lamp.
2
OPEN button
Use to open the LCD monitor.
WARNING lamp
This lamp starts blinking or lights when an error is
detected in the memory card recorder unit.
ꢀꢂ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Viewfinder
An HD viewfinder can be used with this unit. It is recommended to use the optional AJ-CVF100G (59.94/50Hz switching) or
AJ-HVF21KG.
For details on attachment and adjustments of the viewfinder, refer to the operating instructions of the viewfinder.
AJ-CVF100G
16 10 15 9 17 1 11 13 14
5 6 7 8
PEAKING
CHROMA CONTRAST
BRIGHT
12
ON
2 3 4
OFF
1
Viewfinder (optional)
7
8
9
CONTRAST control
The viewfinder displays the video image in color or
monochrome during recording or playback. It also
displays warnings and messages – indicating camera
operating status and settings – zebra patterns and
markers (safety zone and center markers, etc.).
Adjusts the contrast of the screen inside the viewfinder.
The setting of this control has no effect on the output
signal of the camera.
BRIGHT (brightness) control
Adjusts the brightness of the screen inside the
viewfinder. The setting of this control has no effect on
the output signal of the camera.
2
3
CHROMA switch
Switches the display of images between color and
monochrome on the viewfinder.
Front tally lamp
Lights when the camera is shooting if the TALLY switch
is set to HIGH or LOW.
Also, the lamp flashes on and off as a warning
indication, in the same manner as the REC lamp inside
the viewfinder.
The setting of the TALLY switch determines the
brightness of the front tally lamp (HIGH or LOW).
ON:
Displays color images.
OFF:
Displays monochrome images.
ZEBRA switch
Switches a zebra pattern inside the viewfinder.
ON:
Displays a zebra pattern.
OFF:
No zebra pattern is displayed.
The details of the display, such as the type of zebra
pattern, can be set in the DISPLAY SETUP screen.
10 Viewfinder stopper
4
TALLY switch
Controls the front tally lamp.
This is used to attach/detach the viewfinder.
HIGH:
OFF:
LOW:
Makes the front tally lamp brighter.
Turns the front tally lamp off.
Makes the front tally lamp dimmer.
11 Eyepiece
12 Back tally lamp
Lights when the camera is shooting. Also, the lamp
flashes on and off as a warning indication, in the same
manner as the REC lamp inside the viewfinder.
The back tally lamp is hidden when the lever is in the
OFF position.
5
6
PEAKING control
Adjusts the outlines of the images in the viewfinder to
make focusing easier. The setting of this control has no
effect on the output signal of the camera.
CHROMA control
13 Diopter adjuster ring
Adjusts the chroma of the color for the image in the
viewfinder. The setting of this control has no effect on
the output signal of the camera.
Adjust this control to match the vision of the person
using the camera so that the image on the screen in the
viewfinder is as clear as possible.
14 Lock ring
NOTE
In a low temperature environment, the colors in the
displayed image may be paler immediately after switching
on the power.
15 Connection plug
16 Microphone holder
17 Slide rail
ꢀꢃ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback
Setting Date and Time of Internal Clock
The CLOCK SETTING value is recorded in the contents
(clip), and affects the sequence of playback of the
thumbnails. Before carrying out recording, be sure to check
and set CLOCK SETTING and TIME ZONE.
Time zone
Time
difference
Time
difference
+01:00
Area
Area
00:00
Greenwich
Central Europe
-00:30
+01:30
Eastern
Europe
This shows you how to adjust the calendar
-01:00
Azores Islands
Mid-Atlantic
+02:00
to 5:20 PM on November 16, 2011.
-01:30
-02:00
-02:30
-03:00
+02:30
+03:00
+03:30
+04:00
Moscow
Tehran
Abu Dhabi
ꢁ
ꢁ
SetꢁtheꢁPOWERꢁswitchꢁtoꢁON.
1
Buenos Aires
Newfoundland
Island
-03:30
+04:30
Kabul
SelectꢁTIMEꢁZONEꢁitemꢁinꢁOTHERꢁ
2
-04:00
-04:30
-05:00
-05:30
-06:00
-06:30
-07:00
-07:30
-08:00
-08:30
-09:00
Halifax
+05:00
+05:30
+06:00
+06:30
+07:00
+07:30
+08:00
+08:30
+09:00
+09:30
+10:00
Islamabad
Bombay
Dacca
Yangon
Bangkok
FUNCTIONS,ꢁthenꢁpressꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbutton.
• For details on menu operation, refer to [Using the
Menus] (page 106).
New York
Chicago
ꢁ
3
UseꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁsetꢁtheꢁtimeꢁ
differenceꢁfromꢁGreenwichꢁMeanꢁTime.
Denver
Beijing
• Check what time zone you are in and set
accordingly.
Los Angeles
Tokyo
Darwin
Guam
Lord Howe
Island
Solomon
Islands
Norfolk Island
New Zealand
Chatham
Islands
Alaska
Marquesas
Islands
OTHER FUNCTIONS
-09:30
-10:00
+10:30
+11:00
USER FILE
ACCESS LED
ALARM
>>>
ON
LOW
RED
ON
Hawaii
REC TALLY
EVF BAT LED
CLOCK SETTING
TIME ZONE
H PHASE
-10:30
-11:00
+11:30
+12:00
>>>
0:00
0
Midway Island
-11:30
+12:45
+13:00
-12:00
+00:30
Kwajalein
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
NOTE
• The clock is accurate to within about ±30 seconds a month
with the power turned off.
• Check and set the time when accurate time is required. After
setting the time, change the setting menu TIME ZONE item
and the display and the recorded local time will be reset
accordingly.
ꢀꢄ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ꢁ
4
SelectꢁCHANGEꢁatꢁtheꢁCLOCKꢁSETTINGꢁitemꢁ
inꢁOTHERꢁFUNCTIONS,ꢁthenꢁpressꢁtheꢁJOGꢁ
dialꢁbutton.
• The CLOCK SETTING screen appears.
OTHER FUNCTIONS
USER FILE
ACCESS LED
ALARM
REC TALLY
EVF BAT LED
CLOCK SETTING
TIME ZONE
H PHASE
>>>
ON
LOW
RED
ON
RETURN
CHANGE
0
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
ꢁ
5
TurnꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁselectꢁYEAR,ꢁthenꢁ
pressꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbutton.
CLOCK SETTING
YEAR
2011
NOV
16
MONTH
DAY
HOUR
MINUTE
13
07
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
ꢁ
6
TurnꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁsetꢁYEARꢁtoꢁꢀ011,ꢁ
thenꢁpressꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbutton.
• A year between 2000 to 2037 can be set.
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
TurnꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁselectꢁMONTH,ꢁ
thenꢁpressꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbutton.
7
8
9
TurnꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁsetꢁMONTHꢁtoꢁ
NOV,ꢁthenꢁpressꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbutton.
SetꢁDAY,ꢁHOURꢁandꢁMINUTEꢁinꢁtheꢁsameꢁwayꢁ
asꢁsettingꢁYEARꢁandꢁMONTH.
• This is a 24-hour clock.
CLOCK SETTING
YEAR
2011
NOV
16
MONTH
DAY
HOUR
MINUTE
17
20
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
ꢀꢅ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P2 Cards
ꢁ
4
Pushꢁtheꢁejectꢁbuttonꢁthatꢁpopsꢁupꢁtoꢁtheꢁright.
Inserting P2 Cards
• The L and R P2 card access LEDs indicate the
status of the corresponding P2 card.
For details, refer to [P2 Card Access LED and Status
of P2 Cards] (page 31).
NOTE
When using the camera recorder for the first time, be sure to
set the time data beforehand.
For details, refer to [Setting Date and Time of Internal Clock]
(page 28).
ꢁ
ꢁ
TurnꢁonꢁtheꢁPOWERꢁswitch.
Openꢁtheꢁcardꢁslotꢁcover.
1
2
PꢀꢁcardꢁaccessꢁLED
ꢁ
Closeꢁtheꢁcardꢁslotꢁcover.
5
NOTE
• The camera operates only when P2 cards are inserted in both
the L and R P2 card slots.
Slotꢁcover
• To prevent cards from falling out, dust from entering and
reduce the risk of exposure to static electricity, close the
card slot cover before moving the camera.
• Format two P2 cards simultaneously on this camera.
ꢁ
3
InsertꢁPꢀꢁcardsꢁinꢁtheꢁLꢁ(left)ꢁandꢁRꢁ(right)ꢁPꢀꢁ
cardꢁslots.
Removing P2 Cards
• Press in the card until the eject button pops up.
EJECTꢁbutton
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
Openꢁtheꢁcardꢁslotꢁcover.
Raiseꢁtheꢁejectꢁbutton.
1
2
3
ThenꢁdepressꢁtheꢁejectꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁreleaseꢁtheꢁPꢀꢁ
card.
Insertꢁtheꢁcardꢁwithꢁtheꢁ
logoꢁfacingꢁup.
Pressꢁtheꢁraisedꢁejectꢁbuttonꢁ
toꢁremoveꢁaꢁPꢀꢁcard.
Raiseꢁtheꢁejectꢁbutton.
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTE
P2 Card Access LED and Status of
P2 Cards
• When a P2 card is being accessed or recognised after
insertion (P2 card access LED blinks in orange), do not
remove the P2 card. Removing a P2 card during access could
damage it.
• If a P2 card being accessed is removed, the LCD monitor
and viewfinder display “TURN POWER OFF” and the camera
gives a warning using an alarm and the WARNING lamp. In
addition, all P2 card access LEDs blink rapidly in orange. If
this is the case, turn the power off.
P2 card
access
LED
MODE
CHECK
indication
Status of P2 card
Both writing and
1
*
reading enabled,
and to be used
for recording at
present
Stays on Target of
in orange recording
For details, refer to [Warning System] (page 127).
• Removing a P2 card during access may corrupt clip data.
Check the clips and restore them if required.
For details, refer to [Restoring Clips] (page 96).
• If a P2 card being formatted is removed, it may be not
be formatted properly. In this case, the LCD monitor and
viewfinder display “TURN POWER OFF.” If this message
appears, turn off the power, then restart the camera to
reformat the card.
ACTIVE
2
*
Blinks in Being
Writing or reading
being performed.
ACCESSING
INFO
orange
Quickly
blinks in
orange
accessed
Being
The P2 card is
recognized being recognised. READING
Recording
Both writing and
reading enabled.
The card is not
• The P2 card access LED can be set to stay off in the menu
option ACCESS LED in the OTHER FUNCTIONS screen.
When the camera is used in this way, remove cards when the
camera has been powered down or a sufficiently long time
after terminating recording, playback and other operating
modes.
ACTIVE
2
Enabled
*
Card not
supported
supported by this NOT
unit. Replace the SUPPORTED
card.
The P2 card
is not properly
formatted.
• Removing a P2 card during thumbnail display terminates the
thumbnail display.
Incorrect
format
FORMAT
ERROR
Reformat the card.
No P2 card is
inserted.
Card recognition
standby.
The P2 card has
no free space.
Only reading is
enabled.
To Prevent Accidental Erasure of
P2 Card Content
To prevent the content of a P2 card being accidentally
erased, position the write-protect switch on the P2 card at
[Protect].
Card not
inserted
Stays off
NO CARD
FULL
Card full
The write-protect
switch on the P2
card is positioned
at [Protect].
Write-
protected
PROTECTED
Only reading is
enabled.
1
*
MODE CHECK appears on the LCD monitor and in the
viewfinder.
For details, see [LCD Monitor/Viewfinder Screen Status
Displays] (page 67).
Used for recording when recordable P2 cards are
inserted in both the L and R card slots.
Write-protectꢁswitch
2
*
NOTE
Write-protect switchover can be performed while the card is
being accessed (during recording or playback), but does not
take effect until access to the card ceases.
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P2 Card Recording Times
Handling P2 Card Recording
The P2 card is a semiconductor memory card designed for
professional video and broadcast equipment.
• Since the AVC-Intra record data as files, it is ideally
suited for computer processing. The file structure is in
a proprietary format that includes audio and video data
recorded in the MXF file format as well as various other
essential data forming an interrelated folder structure as
shown below.
P2 cards available with this camera
This camera supports the optional AJ-P2C064AG (64 GB)
and AJ-P2E032XG (32 GB) P2 cards, and other 4 GB to 64
GB P2 cards (as of Nov. 2011).
NOTE
• This unit cannot use AJ-P2C002SG (2 GB) cards.
• Depending on the type of P2 card used, you may need to
update the camera driver.
Drive:\
For details, refer to [Updating the Firmware Incorporated into the
Unit] (page 131).
CONTENTS
• For the latest information not available in the Operating
Instructions, visit the support desk at the following website.
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/
AUDIO
CLIP
ICON
PROXY
VIDEO
VOICE
P2 card recording times
(When using two 64 GB cards)
Recording format (codec)
Recording time
Approx. 60 min.
Approx. 120 min.
AVC-I 100
AVC-I 50
LASTCLIP.TXT.
*
Allꢁtheseꢁfoldersꢁareꢁrequired.
ꢁꢁThisꢁfileꢁcontainsꢁtheꢁlastꢁclipꢁdataꢁrecordedꢁ
onꢁaꢁPꢀꢁdevice.
*
NOTE
• The above recording time is for normal recording. Recording
in native mode will extend recording time depending on
system mode.
NOTE
For details, refer to [List of Recording, Playback and Output
Formats] (page 45).
• Use of 32 GB, 16 GB and 8 GB P2 cards will provide 1/2, 1/4
and 1/8, respectively of above recording times.
• The indicated capacities include a management area so the
total area available for recording is somewhat smaller.
If any of this data is changed or lost, it will not be recognized
as P2 data or the P2 card may no longer be possible to use in
a P2 device.
• To prevent data loss in transferring P2 card data to a PC
or write back PC data on a P2 card, use P2 Viewer, which
can be downloaded from the website listed below. You
can also visit the support desk at the following website for
details on the system requirements of P2 Viewer.
Splitting clips recorded on P2 cards
This camera will automatically generate additional clips
for a continuous recording on an 8 GB or higher capacity
P2 card when the recording exceeds the durations given
below. Even so, a P2 device will handle such clips as a
single clip in thumbnail operations (display, delete, recover,
copy, etc.). Such recordings may be handled as separate
clips by nonlinear editing software or a PC.
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/
• Follow the steps below to use general software such as
Microsoft Windows Explorer or Apple Finder to transfer
the data to a PC. Be sure to use P2 Viewer to write data
back to a P2 card.
• Treat the CONTENTS folder and the LASTCLIP.TXT file
as a unit.
• Do not modify the data below the CONTENTS folder.
• In copying, be sure to copy both the CONTENTS folder
and the LASTCLIP.TXT file together.
Recording format
(excluding Native format)
Continuous recording time
AVC-I 100
AVC-I 50
Approx. 5 min.
Approx. 10 min.
• When transferring data from multiple P2 cards,
create separate folders for each P2 card to prevent
overwriting clips with identical names.
• Do not delete data on a P2 card.
• Format P2 cards only on a P2 card device.
3ꢀ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Procedures
This section describes the basic procedure for shooting
and recording.
Before you embark on a shoot, pre-inspect your system to
ensure that it works properly.
For directions on inspecting your memory card camera-
recorder, see [Inspections Before Shooting] (page 123).
Setting the switches before shooting and
recording
When a battery and P2 cards are installed, set the switches
as detailed below, before starting to use your AG-3DP1.
a
d
e
Battery Set-up to P2 card Insertion
ꢁ
Insertꢁaꢁchargedꢁbattery.
1
2
ꢁ
TurnꢁtheꢁPOWERꢁswitchꢁtoꢁONꢁtoꢁcheckꢁtheꢁ
batteryꢁremainingꢁlevelꢁonꢁtheꢁLCDꢁmonitorꢁorꢁ
inꢁtheꢁviewfinder.
• When battery capacity is low, replace it with a fully
charged battery.
NOTE
When low battery capacity is indicated after replacing
a battery with a fully charged battery, check battery
installation.
For details, refer to [BATTERY SETUP Screen] (page 117).
bc
f
a
b
c
IRIS selector switch
The iris is automatically adjusting if the IRIS selector
switch is set to A (AUTO).
ꢁ
3
InsertꢁPꢀꢁcardsꢁintoꢁtheꢁLꢁandꢁRꢁPꢀꢁcardꢁslotsꢁ
andꢁcheckꢁthatꢁtheꢁPꢀꢁcardꢁaccessꢁLEDsꢁlightꢁ
inꢁorangeꢁbeforeꢁclosingꢁtheꢁslotꢁcover.
GAIN switch
Normally, this should be set to L (0 dB). If conditions are
too dark, an appropriate gain level should be set.
AUTO KNEE selector switch
Set to ON or OFF. Selecting BARS turns off this function
and outputs a color bar signal.
d
e
f
TCG switch
Set to F-RUN or R-RUN.
AUDIO SELECT CH 1/CH 2 switch
Set to AUTO.
LCD/EVF button
Normally, select MIX mode (left and right images are
mixed), by pressing the LCD/EVF button.
Light
NOTE
For secure recording of 3D images, recording cannot be
started even if the REC button is operated in the following
situations:
• While the camera is identifying a P2 card after the power is
turned on or immediately after the P2 card is inserted (when
the P2 card access LED is blinking in orange
• When thumbnails are displayed or during playback or
transport process, such as PLAY, FF, or REV.
• During a recording ending process.
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ꢁ
3
Pointꢁtheꢁcameraꢁatꢁyourꢁsubjectꢁandꢁadjustꢁtheꢁ
convergenceꢁpoint,ꢁusingꢁtheꢁCONV.ꢁdial.
Shooting
For details, refer to [Adjusting the Convergence
Point] (page 54).
White/Black Balance Adjustment to
Recording Completion
For shooting, follow the steps below.
6, 7
ꢁ
Pointꢁtheꢁcameraꢁatꢁyourꢁsubjectꢁtoꢁadjustꢁtheꢁ
focus,ꢁandꢁzoom.
4
5
4
1
ꢁ
Toꢁuseꢁtheꢁelectronicꢁshutter,ꢁsetꢁtheꢁshutterꢁ
speedꢁandꢁshutterꢁmode.
For more information, see [Setting the Electronic
Shutter] (page 48).
ꢁ
ꢁ
PressꢁtheꢁRECꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁstartꢁrecording.
Toꢁstopꢁrecording,ꢁpressꢁtheꢁRECꢁbutton.
6
7
5
2
NOTE
3
Shooting the sun and other very bright subjects may produce
a color cast in surrounding areas.
ꢁ
ꢁ
UseꢁtheꢁNDꢁFILTERꢁ
ꢁbuttonsꢁtoꢁselectꢁaꢁ
1
Operation Buttons
filterꢁaccordingꢁtoꢁambientꢁlightꢁconditions.
During recording, all operation buttons (REW, FF, PLAY/PAUSE,
STOP) are disabled.
ꢁWhenꢁtheꢁwhiteꢁbalanceꢁisꢁsaved:
2
• Position the WHITE BAL switch to A or B.
ꢁWhenꢁtheꢁwhiteꢁorꢁblackꢁbalanceꢁisꢁnotꢁsavedꢁ
andꢁyouꢁhaveꢁnoꢁtimeꢁtoꢁadjustꢁtheꢁwhiteꢁ
Normal Recording
Pressing the REC button starts recording of video and
sound on the P2 cards.
balance:
• The 3D recording mode is set by factory default. The left-
lens (L) image is recorded on the P2 card in card slot L ,
and the right-lens (R) image on the P2 card in card slot R.
• The video and audio (including additional information)
recorded in one session is referred to as a clip.
• Position the WHITE BAL switch to PRST.
• The color temperature can be set to 3200 K or
5600 K.
For details, refer to [Adjusting the White Balance
and Black Balance] (page 46).
RECꢁbutton
ꢁIfꢁtheꢁwhiteꢁbalanceꢁisꢁadjustedꢁonꢁtheꢁspot:
• Select a filter according to ambient light
conditions. Then, position the WHITE BAL
switch to A or B and shoot a white test subject
so that it appears at the center of the screen.
Then, follow the steps below to adjust the white
balance.
1. Turn the AUTO W/B BAL switch toward AWB
to adjust the white balance.
2. Turn the AUTO W/B BAL switch toward ABB
to adjust the black balance.
3. Turn the AUTO W/B BAL switch toward AWB
to adjust the white balance again.
RECꢁbutton
For directions on making adjustments, see
[Adjusting the White Balance] (page 46) and
[Adjusting the Black Balance] (page 47).
NOTE
Pressing the REC button will not immediately stop data write
operations to a P2 card in the following situations. And the
REC button operation is not recognized.
• When terminating a short recording
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Switching over to the 3D recording mode
2D LL Recording
You can record the left-lens (L) image on both the L and R
To switch over from the 2D LL recording mode to the 3D
recording mode, do the following:
P2 cards.
ꢁ
SetꢁtheꢁmenuꢁoptionꢁRECꢁMODEꢁinꢁtheꢁ
SYSTEMꢁSETUPꢁscreenꢁtoꢁ3D.
1
2
ꢁ
ꢁ
SetꢁtheꢁmenuꢁoptionꢁRECꢁMODEꢁinꢁtheꢁ
SYSTEMꢁSETUPꢁscreenꢁtoꢁꢀDꢁLL.
1
For details on menu operation, refer to [Using the
Menus] (page 106).
For details on menu operation, refer to [Using the
Menus] (page 106).
ꢁ
Turnꢁoffꢁtheꢁpower,ꢁfollowingꢁtheꢁinstructionsꢁonꢁ
theꢁLCDꢁmonitor,ꢁthenꢁturnꢁitꢁbackꢁonꢁagain.
• The camera starts in 3D recording mode.
Turnꢁoffꢁtheꢁpower,ꢁfollowingꢁtheꢁinstructionsꢁonꢁ
theꢁLCDꢁmonitor,ꢁthenꢁturnꢁitꢁbackꢁonꢁagain.
2
• The camera starts in 2D LL recording mode and
“2D LL” is displayed on the upper left of the LCD
monitor/viewfinder screen.
• Insert two writable P2 cards into the L and R P2
card slots.
• When the cards are identified, “PAUSE” is
displayed on the operation status display.
ꢁ
3
PressꢁtheꢁRECꢁbutton.
• One of the following indicators appear on the
operation status display.
• REC lights during recording.
• PAUSE lights during recording pause.
NOTE
• Shot marks and clip meta data are recorded on the “L” P2
card only.
• Clips recorded in 3D recording mode cannot be checked
when 2D LL recording mode is set. Clips recorded in 2D LL
recording mode cannot be checked when 3D recording mode
is set.
• Use one P2 card for either the 3D recording mode or 2D LL
mode exclusively. Do not mix the two modes on one card.
• The CONV. dial is disabled in 2D LL recording mode although
it can be rotated.
• The L/R outputs are both left-lens (L) signals, but they are
output as 3D video.
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Native Recording
Native recording extracts only the active frames according
to the recording frame rate. It provides a longer recording
time than the normal recording time.
For details on recording time, refer to [List of Recording,
Playback and Output Formats] (page 45).
Also in native recording, the output of camera video and
playback video is a 59.94 (50) frame rate.
Cameraꢁcapture
A
B
C
D
(10ꢄ0/ꢀ4PN)
ꢀ:3ꢁpull-down
Ao Ae Bo Be Bo Ce Co De Do De
Recording
A
B
C
D
Cameraꢁcapture
(ꢃꢀ0/ꢀ4PN)
A
B
C
D
A�
A
B�
B
C�
C
D�
D
ꢀ:3ꢁpull-down
Recording
A
B
C
D
ꢁActiveꢁframe
Cameraꢁcapture
(ꢃꢀ0/30PNꢁ(ꢀ5PN))
ꢀ:ꢀꢁpull-down
A
B
C
D
A�
A
A
B�
B
C�
C
D�
D
Recording
B
C
D
ꢁActiveꢁframe
NOTE
In 24P, 24PN (native recording) and in 30PN/25PN (native
recording) at 720P, the camera starts recording in 5-frame,
4-frame and 2-frame segments, respectively. For this reason,
to continue recording clips in a system mode using a different
recording segmentation may break the continuity of the time
code.
3ꢂ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Variable Frame Rate (VFR) Recording
In 720P mode, this camera is capable of frame skipping
Standard VFR Recording
(pulldown recording)
(undercranking) and high-speed (overcranking) recording.
The camera operator can select between native (PN)
recording mode and standard (OVER) recording.
Native VFR Recording
ꢁ
InꢁtheꢁSYSTEMꢁSETUPꢁscreen,ꢁsetꢁtheꢁmenuꢁ
optionꢁSYSTEMꢁMODEꢁtoꢁꢃꢀ0-5ꢅ.ꢅ4Pꢁ(ꢃꢀ0-
50P)ꢁandꢁtheꢁmenuꢁoptionꢁRECꢁFORMATꢁtoꢁ
AVC-Iꢁ100/ꢂ0Pꢁ(50P).
1
2
ꢁ
ꢁ
InꢁtheꢁSYSTEMꢁSETUPꢁscreen,ꢁsetꢁtheꢁmenuꢁ
optionꢁSYSTEMꢁMODEꢁtoꢁꢃꢀ0-5ꢅ.ꢅ4Pꢁ(ꢃꢀ0-
50P)ꢁandꢁtheꢁmenuꢁoptionꢁRECꢁFORMATꢁtoꢁ
AVC-Iꢁ100/ꢀ4PN,ꢁ30PNꢁ(ꢀ5PN).
1
ꢁ
InꢁtheꢁSCENEꢁFILEꢁscreen,ꢁsetꢁtheꢁmenuꢁ
optionꢁVFRꢁtoꢁONꢁandꢁtheꢁmenuꢁoptionꢁFRAMEꢁ
RATEꢁtoꢁsuitꢁshootingꢁpurposes.
InꢁtheꢁSCENEꢁFILEꢁscreen,ꢁsetꢁtheꢁmenuꢁ
optionꢁVFRꢁtoꢁONꢁandꢁtheꢁmenuꢁoptionꢁFRAMEꢁ
RATEꢁtoꢁsuitꢁshootingꢁpurposes.
2
• The frame rate can be set to a value beteween
12 frames (12P) to 60 frames (60P) when system
mode is set to 720-59.94P.
• The frame rate can be set to a value between
12 frames (12P) and 50 frames (50P) when the
system mode is set to 720-50P.
• The frame rate can be set to a value beteween
12 frames (12P) to 60 frames (60P) when system
mode is set to 720-59.94P. and to a value
beteween 12 frames (12P) to 50 frames (50P)
when system mode is set to 720-50P.
• The frame rate can be set to a value between
12 frames (12P) and 50 frames (50P) when the
system mode is set to 720-50P.
ꢁ
3
PressꢁtheꢁRECꢁbutton.
This starts recording in the VFR mode (OVER 60P
(50P)).
This mode can be combined with the AVC-I 100/60P (50P)
and AVC-I 50/60P (50P) recording formats.
For details, refer to [List of Recording, Playback and Output
Formats] (page 45).
ꢁ
3
PressꢁtheꢁRECꢁbutton.
This starts recording in the VFR mode (native VFR).
For details, refer to [SYSTEM SETUP screen] (page 111).
This mode can be combined with the AVC-I 100, AVC-I 50,
30PN, and 24PN (25PN) recording formats.
For details, refer to [List of Recording, Playback and Output
Formats] (page 45).
NOTE
• Audio playback is disabled when a frame rate converter is
used to extract active frames for over and under-cranking.
• Note the following about standard VFR recording.
- Interval recording is not available.
For details, refer to [SYSTEM SETUP Screen] (page 111).
NOTE
- Sound is recorded.
Note the following about native VFR recording.
- Interval recording is not available.
1
- Sound cannot be recorded.
*
1
*
- The time code is locked to Rec Run.
- Thumbnail screens are created 1 frame later than video
recorded on a P2 card, but this is not a malfunction.
1 In 24PN and 30PN (25PN) recording modes, when the frame
*
rate is 24 and 30 (25) frames per second, respectively, audio
can also be recorded. The time code can be set to Free Run
(F-RUN).
3ꢃ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using VFR Recording Function
Standard speed for film production (only when SYSTEM MODE is set to 720-59.94P,
1080-23.98PsF)
Screen production normally requires a 24 fps (24 frames per second) frame rate (normal speed) for screening a film.
Making the settings described below will provide film-quality playback. The 720P progressive mode and cine-like gamma
will make video look like it was shot with a film camera.
Standard settings for film production
SYSTEM MODE settings
Recording frame rate
SYSTEM MODE
Other settings
AVC-I 100/24PN
(AVC-I 50/24PN)
OFF
REC FORMAT
VFR
720 - 59.94P
24 frames
AVC-I 100/24PN
(AVC-I 50/24PN)
1080 - 23.98PsF
REC FORMAT
Shooting at standard speed for producing commercials and TV programs
Production aimed at HDTV and SDTV broadcasts for TV audiences must use the frame rate (x1) of 30fps (30 frames/s),
25fps (25 frames/s). The settings below allow you to obtain the kind of playback used for broadcast programs. This permits
film-like video recording of commercials and music clips that also provide a frame rate suitable for broadcasting.
Standard settings for producing commercials and dramas
SYETEM MODE settings
Recording frame rate
SYSTEM MODE
Other settings
AVC-I 100/30PN
(AVC-I 50/30PN)
OFF
AVC-I 100/30PN
(AVC-I 50/30PN)
AVC-I 100/25PN
(AVC-I 50/25PN)
OFF
REC FORMAT
VFR
720-59.94P
30 frames
25 frames
1080-59.94i
720-50P
REC FORMAT
REC FORMAT
VFR
AVC-I 100/25PN
(AVC-I 50/25PN)
1080-50i
REC FORMAT
3ꢄ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Undercranking effects
This effect produces the quick motion often used for showing clouds drifting across the sky, crowds of people swarming
past a solitary standing individual, a kung fu demonstration and other performances. For example, selecting a VFR
recording frame rate of 12 fps when shooting at a 24P recording format yields a fast-motion effect of approx. 2x normal
speed. The same effect can be obtained at a 30P recording and a 25P recording.
Standard setup for undercranking effects
SYETEM MODE settings
Recording frame rate
SYSTEM MODE
Other settings
AVC-I 100/24PN
(AVC-I 50/24PN)
ON
REC FORMAT
720-59.94P
12 to 22 frames
12 to 24 frames
VFR
FRAME RATE
Set to 22 frames or less
AVC-I 100/25PN
(AVC-I 50/25PN)
ON
REC FORMAT
720-50P
VFR
FRAME RATE
Set to 24 frames or less
Overcranking effects
Overcranking produces slow-motion playback, which is frequently used in climax scenes, or for dramatic effects like car
chases and action scenes. For example, selecting a recording frame rate of 60 fps when shooting a 24P recording format
yields a slow-motion effect that is 2.5 times normal speed. Shooting 720P progressive video will produce smooth and high-
quality slow-motion. The same effect can be obtained at a 30P recording and a 25P recording.
Standard setup for overcranking effects
SYSTEM MODE setup
Recording frame rate
SYSTEM MODE
Other settings
AVC-I 100/24PN
(AVC-I 50/24PN)
ON
REC FORMAT
720-59.94P
25 to 60 frames
26 to 50 frames
VFR
FRAME RATE
Set to 25 frames or more
AVC-I 100/25PN
(AVC-I 50/25PN)
ON
REC FORMAT
720-50P
VFR
FRAME RATE
Set to 26 frames or more
Frame rate settings
When SYSTEM MODE is 720P and VFR is ON, the following frame rates can be set with the menu option FRAME RATE in
the SCENE FILE screen.
SYSTEM MODE
720-59.94P
720-50P
Recording frame rate
12, 15, 18, 20, 21, 22, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 30, 32, 34, 36, 40, 44, 48, 54, 60
12, 15, 18, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 30, 32, 34, 37, 42, 45, 48, 50
3ꢅ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Special Recording Modes
During P2 card recording, interval recording can be
enabled from the RECORDING SETUP screen.
The interval recording mode is available only with the
following settings:
Interval Recording (INTERVAL REC)
This function is used to record 1 frame at the time interval
set in the INTERVAL TIME item.
SYSTEM MODE
REC FORMAT
AVC-I 100/60i
AVC-I 50/60i
AVC-I 100/60P
AVC-I 50/60P
AVC-I 100/50i
AVC-I 50/50i
AVC-I 100/50P
AVC-I 50/50P
Other conditions
1ꢁframeꢁ
recording
1ꢁframeꢁ
recording
1ꢁframeꢁ
recording
1080-59.94i
(time)
720-59.94P
1080-50i
720-50P
Turn VFR OFF
SetꢁINTERVAL SetꢁINTERVAL
TIMEꢁsetting TIMEꢁsetting
Turn VFR OFF
ꢁ
ꢁ
CheckꢁthatꢁtheꢁSYSTEMꢁSETUPꢁscreenꢁisꢁsetꢁ
upꢁasꢁshownꢁinꢁtheꢁleftꢁtable.
1
For details on menu operation, refer to [Using the
Menus] (page 106).
SelectꢁINTERVALꢁinꢁtheꢁmenuꢁoptionꢁRECꢁ
FUNCTIONꢁinꢁtheꢁRECORDINGꢁSETUPꢁ
screen.
2
ꢁ
ꢁ
SetꢁtheꢁtimeꢁinꢁtheꢁmenuꢁoptionꢁINTERVALꢁ
TIMEꢁinꢁtheꢁRECORDINGꢁSETUPꢁscreen.
3
PressꢁtheꢁRECꢁbutton.
4
• The camera will repeat 1-frame recording for the
time interval set in the INTERVAL TIME option.
• Press the STOP button to stop recording.
• To cancel this function, turn the camera off or
select NORMAL in the REC FUNCTION option.
• The following indications appear to the left of the
operation status display.
• During recording: “I-REC” stays lit.
• During a pause: “I-PAUSE” stays lit.
When a setting of less than 2 seconds is made
in step 3, “I-REC” blinks according to time
setting during recording.
• When stopped: “I-” in “I-PAUSE” blinks.
NOTE
• Sound is not recorded.
• Data recorded (until the STOP button is pressed) in
this mode is recorded as a single file.
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REC CHECK Function
Pressing the USER button (USER MAIN, USER1 or USER2)
or the RET/REC CHECK button to which REC CHECK has
been assigned will automatically locate and play back the
last two seconds of the most recent clip.
Use this function to check that recording is performed
normally. The camera returns to recording standby mode
after playback.
• You can use menu options USER MAIN, USER1, USER2,
and RET in the SW MODE screen to assign the REC
CHECK function to the desired button.
Shot Marker (SHOT MARK)
Recording Function
This function can be used to distinguish a clip from other
clips by adding a thumbnail to each clip.
This also makes possible to display or play back the
marked clips only.
To add shot marks
ꢁ
InꢁtheꢁSWꢁMODEꢁscreen,ꢁassignꢁSHOTꢁMARKꢁ
toꢁaꢁuserꢁbuttonꢁ(USERꢁMAIN,ꢁUSER1ꢁorꢁ
USERꢀ).
1
2
For details on menu operation, refer to [Using the
Menus] (page 106).
ꢁ
PressꢁtheꢁUSERꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁwhichꢁSHOTꢁMARKꢁ
hasꢁbeenꢁassignedꢁduringꢁrecordingꢁorꢁwhenꢁ
recordingꢁisꢁpaused.
• SHOT MARK ON is displayed as a shot mark is
inserted in the currently recorded clip.
• Pressing this key a second time displays SHOT
MARK OFF and the shot mark is deleted.
NOTE
• A shot mark added during a pause after recording is added
to the most recently recorded clip.
• Shot marks can be added also in the thumbnail display.
• The shot mark function is not available during, interval
recording. When this function is not available, pressing this
button displays SHOT MARK INVALID.
• Shot marks can be set or cancelled in playback pause mode
but not during playback.
• Shot marks are added on the “L” P2 card only.
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Normal and Variable Speed Playback
Normal speed playback
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button to view playback on the LCD
monitor and in the viewfinder in color. Connecting a color
video monitor to the HD SDI MONITOR OUT, HD SDI OUT
1(L)/2(R) or HDMI connector will enable playback of color
video.
The PLAY/PAUSE button can be used to pause playback.
• During normal playback, 3D display mode is available.
(3D recording mode)
Fast-forward/fast-reverse playback
The FF and REW buttons provide 32× and 4× fast
playbacks and fast reverse playbacks. In stop mode, this
function will play back video at 32× speed and in playback
mode, it will play back video at 4× speed.
• Only 2D display mode is available during fast-forward
and fast-reverse playback.
Clip cue up
When playback is paused, the FF button locates the
beginning of the next clip while staying in pause mode.
When playback is paused, the REW button locates the
beginning of the current clip while staying in pause mode.
NOTE
• It may take some time to load clip data if playback is started
or a thumbnail screen is opened right after removing or
inserting a P2 card or turning the power on.The thumbnail
screen displays UPDATING at such times.
• To play back a clip in a different SYSTEM MODE, adjust
the SYSTEM MODE to the clip to reset the camera before
playback.
• Playback of the audio channels CH5 to CH8 recorded on
another device is not possible.
• For information on the output connectors and video output
formats depending on the settings, refer to [Selecting Video
Output] (page 44).
4ꢀ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording
Selecting Recording Signals
This camera records HD (1080i, 720P) signals using AVC-Intra codec.
It provides a variety of capture frame rates and recording frame rates (native recording) to suit specific applications.
Select recording and recording signal in the setting menus listed below.
Screen
Setting menu
Setting
Selects the signal format from among 1080/59.94i, 1080/23.98PsF,
1080/50i, 720/59.94P, and 720/50P.
SYSTEM MODE
To change this setting, wait until TURN POWER OFF appears before
turning the power off and then turn it back on again.
Selects AVC-I 100 or AVC-I 50 codec. For each of 1080 or 720 system,
60i, 60P, 30PN, 24PN, 50i, 50P and 25PN can be selected.
Selects 3D or 2D LL recording mode.
To change this setting, wait until TURN POWER OFF appears before
turning the power off and then turn it back on again.
Setting this function to ON in 720P mode starts variable frame rate capture
which records at the frame rate set in the FRAME RATE option.
For details, refer to [Variable Frame Rate (VFR) Recording] (page 37).
When the VFR option is set to ON, select the frame rate for variable frame
rate recording.
SYSTEM SETUP screen
REC FORMAT
REC MODE
VFR
SCENE FILE screen
FRAME RATE
NOTE
Changing the menu options SYSTEM MODE and REC FORMAT may distort video and audio, but this is not a malfunction.
List of Recording Formats and Functions
The table below lists the recording formats and recording functions that the camera supports.
REC FUNCTION
Operation mode
REC FORMAT (menu)
VFR (menu) SHOT MARK
(menu)
AVC-I 100/60i, 60P, 50i, 50P
(AVC-I 50/60i, 60P, 50i, 50P) only
Interval recording
INTERVAL
Disabled
ON
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Native VFR
Native recording
(VFR OFF)
Standard VFR
Normal recording
(VFR OFF)
AVC-I 100/24PN, 30PN, 25PN
(AVC-I 50/24PN, 30PN, 25PN)
OFF
NORMAL
ON
Other than AVC-I 100/24PN, 30PN, 25PN
(AVC-I 50/24PN, 30PN, 25PN)
OFF
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting Video Output
Use the OUTPUT SEL screen to select the video output.
Menu options in the
OUTPUT SEL screen
Setting
Selects the signal to be output from the HD SDI OUT 1 (L)/2 (R) connectors and HD SDI
MONITOR OUT connector.
ON: The HD SDI OUT 1 (L)/2 (R) connectors output the left-lens (L) image and the right-
lens (R) image. The HD SDI MONITOR OUT connector outputs the same image as that
selected with the menu option MONTIOR OUT SEL.
ON (SIDE): The HD SDI OUT 1 (L)/2 (R) connectors normally output the SIDE by SIDE
images. During playback, however, they do not output SIDE by SIDE images but instead
the left-lens (L) image and right-lens (R) image. The HD SDI MONITOR OUT connector
outputs the same image as that selected with the menu option MONTIOR OUT SEL.
OFF: The HD SDI OUT 1 (L)/2 (R) connectors and the HD SDI MONITOR OUT connector
output no images. If a monitor is connected to the HDMI connector, an image compatible
with the monitor is output from the HDMI connector.
SDI OUT
Selects the image to be output from the HD SDI MONITOR OUT connector and HDMI
connector. 1 During playback, however, the output is fixed to the left-lens (L) image.
*
NORMAL: The same image as that displayed on the LCD monitor is output.
L: The left-lens (L) image is output.
MON OUT SEL
MIX: The mixed left-lens (L) image and right-lens (R) image is output.
SIDE: The SIDE by SIDE image is output.
1 No image is output from the HD SDI MONITOR OUT connector when the menu option SDI OUT is set to OFF. No image
is output from the HDMI connector if the menu option SDI OUT is set to ON or ON (SIDE).
*
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
List of Recording, Playback and Output Formats
SDI L/R/
MONITOR
SDI OUT ON
Setting menu
HDMI
Recording
time
(64 GB)
Recording
format
SDI OUT OFF
FRAME
RATE
(FRAME)
SYSTEM
MODE
REC
VFR
FORMAT
Video Audio 3D
SideBySide 720P
1080 480P576P
60i
1080/60i
59.94i
60 min
—
30PN
1080/30PN
29.97PsF
59.94i
SbyS
1080
L
L
L
480
59.94p
1080
59.94i 100/50
AVC-I
4ch
Field
1080
59.94i
1080
59.94i
Disabled Disabled
23.98P
OVER
59.94i
2:3
Packing 59.94i
1
—
1080/24PN
*
1080
AVC-I
23.98
100/50
PsF
24P
Frame
Packing
L
L
L
480
59.94p
2
3
24PN
60P
1080/24PN
80 min
60 min
4ch
1080
59.94i
1080
59.94i
Disabled Disabled
23.98PsF
—
*
*
OFF
ON
59.94P
59.94P
VFR
Disabled
12-60
720/60P
4ch
29.97P
OVER
59.94P
2:2
OFF
Disabled
30
720/30PN
30PN
24PN
120 min
150 min
59.94P
Frame
Packing
L
720
59.94P
L
L
480
59.94P
720
AVC-I
ON
3
1080
59.94i
—
*
Other
than 30
Disabled
720/30PN
VFR
720/24PN
59.94P
VFR
23.98P
OVER
59.94P
2:3
59.94P
VFR
50i
59.94P 100/50
Muted
4ch
OFF
24
720/24PN
ON
Other
than 24
720/24PN
VFR
Muted
4ch
50i
Field
Packing
SbyS
1080
50i
L
1080
50i
L
1080
50i
L
576
50p
50i
50i
1080
50i
AVC-I
100/50
60 min
60 min
Disabled Disabled
25PN
25PN
25PsF
50P
50P VFR
25P
OVER
50P
2:2
OFF
ON
OFF
Disabled
12-50
50P
720/50P
4ch
720/25PN
Disabled
50P
Frame
Packing
L
720
50p
L
1080
50i
L
576
50p
720
50P
AVC-I
100/50
3
—
*
4ch
25
720/25PN
25PN
120 min
ON
Other
than 25
720/25PN
VFR
50P
VFR
Muted
1 When playing back the data recorded in 1080/23.98PsF format with 1080/59.94i
2 The 23.98P OVER 59.94i 2:3 signal is output from MONITOR OUT when SYSTEM MODE is set to 1080/23.98PsF.
3 The HDMI output depends on the connected equipment, as this format is not specified by HDMI standards.
*
*
*
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the White Balance and Black Balance
To record high-quality video with the AG-3DP1, the black
and white balances must be adjusted according to
conditions.
ꢁ
2
AdjustꢁtheꢁNDꢁfilterꢁwithꢁtheꢁNDꢁFILTERꢁbuttonsꢁ
accordingꢁtoꢁtheꢁlightingꢁconditions.
For higher quality, it is recommended that the adjustments
should be made in this order AWB (white balance
adjustment) ABB (black balance adjustment) AWB
(white balance adjustment).
For examples of the settings with the ND FILTER
buttons, refer to [Shooting and Recording/Playback
Functions Section] (page 19).
NOTE
ꢁ
3
Placeꢁaꢁwhiteꢁpatternꢁatꢁaꢁpointꢁwhereꢁtheꢁ
lightingꢁconditionsꢁmatchꢁthoseꢁforꢁtheꢁlightꢁ
sourceꢁofꢁtheꢁsubject.ꢁThenꢁzoom-inꢁonꢁtheꢁ
whiteꢁpatternꢁsoꢁthatꢁwhiteꢁcolorꢁappearsꢁinꢁtheꢁ
screen.
If white balance and black balance adjustments are made
while the video image is distorted due to GENLOCK, the
adjustments may not be correct. Wait for the video image
to return to normal before performing white balance and
black balance adjustments again.
• A white object (cloth or wall) may be used instead
of a white pattern. The illustration below shows the
required size for the white space.
Adjusting the White Balance
Whenever light conditions change, the white balance must
NOTE
be readjusted.
To adjust the white balance, follow the steps below.
• Do not point the camera at a high-brightness area.
• The white object must appear at the center of the
screen.
a
d
1/3ꢁorꢁmoreꢁofꢁtheꢁscreenꢁinꢁwidth
1/3ꢁorꢁmoreꢁofꢁtheꢁ
screenꢁinꢁheight
ꢁ
ꢁ
TurnꢁtheꢁCONV.ꢁdialꢁsoꢁthatꢁtheꢁconvergenceꢁ
pointꢁ(referenceꢁplane)ꢁisꢁsetꢁonꢁtheꢁwhiteꢁ
pattern.
4
b
c e
f
a
ND FILTER buttons
These buttons adjust the amount of light entering the
MOS sensor.
Adjustꢁtheꢁlensꢁiris.
5
• Use the Y GET function (for details, refer to
page 50) and adjust the iris to a approximately
70 % of incoming light.
b
c
AUTO W/B BAL switch
Use for automatic control of white balance.
GAIN selector switch
Normally set to 0 dB. If this is too dark, adjust gain as
necessary.
ꢁ
TurnꢁtheꢁAUTOꢁW/BꢁBALꢁswitchꢁtowardꢁAWBꢁ
andꢁreleaseꢁit.
6
7
d
e
f
OUTPUT selector switch
Set to CAM.
• The switch returns to the central position with the
white balance automatically adjusted.
WHITE BAL switch
Set to A or B.
ꢁ
Duringꢁanꢁadjustment,ꢁtheꢁLCDꢁmonitorꢁandꢁtheꢁ
viewfinderꢁdisplayꢁtheꢁfollowingꢁmessage:
CONV. dial
Use to adjust the convergence.
AWB Ach ACTIVE
ꢁ
1
SetꢁtheꢁGAIN,ꢁOUTPUTꢁandꢁWHITEꢁBALꢁ
switches.
4ꢂ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ꢁ
8
Theꢁadjustmentꢁwillꢁtakeꢁeffectꢁinꢁaꢁfewꢁ
seconds,ꢁandꢁtheꢁfollowingꢁmessageꢁwillꢁ
appear:
Adjusting the Black Balance
The black balance must be adjusted when:
• You use your camera the first time.
• The adjusted value is automatically stored in the
selected memory (A or B).
• Your camera has not been used for some time.
• The ambient temperature has changed substantially.
• The gain switchover value has been changed.
• The menu options SYSTEM MODE and REC FORMAT in
the SYSTEM SETUP screen.
AWB
A
END 3.2K
• “C TEMP+7” to “C TEMP-7” will appear when C
TEMP of the scene file is set to the value other
than 0.
Adjust the black balance before shooting to ensure
optimum video quality.
ꢁ
9
Ifꢁtheꢁsubject’sꢁcolorꢁtemperatureꢁisꢁlowerꢁthanꢁ
ꢀ300ꢁKꢁorꢁhigherꢁthanꢁꢅꢅ00ꢁKꢁtheꢁfollowingꢁ
messageꢁappears:
• If the arrow points down () the actual color
temperature is lower than the temperature
indicated. If the arrow points up () the actual
temperature is higher than the temperature
indicated.
AWB
A
END 2.3K
a
b
a
b
AUTO W/B BAL switch
Use for automatic control of black balance.
ꢁ Checkꢁtheꢁadjustmentꢁresultsꢁforꢁtheꢁleftꢁandꢁ
rightꢁimages,ꢁusingꢁtheꢁLCDꢁmonitorꢁorꢁtheꢁ
connectedꢁmonitor.
10
OUTPUT selector switch
Set to CAM.
• Left and right adjustments may differ depending
on the location of a light source or movement of
the subject.
ꢁ
ꢁ
TiltꢁtheꢁAUTOꢁW/BꢁBALꢁswitchꢁsoꢁthatꢁitꢁisꢁ
positionedꢁatꢁABB,ꢁthenꢁreleaseꢁit.
1
• The switch returns to the central position with the
black balance automatically adjusted.
When you have no time to adjust the
white balance
Position the WHITE BAL switch at PRST.
• Turning the AUTO W/B BAL switch to AWB toggles the
color temperature between 3200 K and 5600 K.
Duringꢁadjustment,ꢁtheꢁLCDꢁmonitorꢁandꢁ
viewfinderꢁdisplayꢁtheꢁfollowingꢁmessage:
2
ABB ACTIVE
When the white balance has not been
automatically adjusted
When the white balance has not been successfully
adjusted, the LCD monitor/viewfinder displays an error
message.
ꢁ
3
Theꢁadjustmentꢁwillꢁtakeꢁeffectꢁinꢁaꢁfewꢁsecondsꢁ
andꢁtheꢁfollowingꢁmessageꢁwillꢁappear:
Error message
Description
AWB Ach
(or Bch) NG
The color temperature is too high or
too low.
ABB END
There is insufficient light.
The convergence point (reference
plane) is deviated.
• The adjusted value is automatically stored in the
memory.
LOW LIGHT
LEVEL OVER
There is too much light.
NOTE
LCD monitor/viewfinder displays related
to white balance
• Black balance adjustment is not available during recording.
• Pressing the REC button during ABB adjustment will not
start recording on a P2 card.
See [LCD Monitor/Viewfinder Screen Status Displays]
(page 67).
4ꢃ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting the Electronic Shutter
When SYSTEM MODE is set to 1080-50i or 720-
Setting the Shutter Mode and
Speed
50P
Forꢁ50iꢁandꢁ50Pꢁrecording
S/S (1/12.5) (1/25) 1/50
1/250
1/60 1/120
ꢁ
1
PressꢁtheꢁSHUTTERꢁswitchꢁpositionedꢁatꢁOFFꢁ
towardsꢁON.
Forꢁꢀ5Pꢁrecording
S/S (1/12.5) 1/50 1/60
1/250
1/120
NOTE
• In any electronic shutter mode, a slower shutter speed will
reduce camera sensitivity.
• In auto iris mode, a faster shutter speed will increase the
aperture and lower the depth of field.
• Changes in synchro scan and shutter speed settings may
cause screen flicker.
• Under fluorescent lighting and other discharge lighting
systems, horizontal stripes may appear on the screen.
Changing the shutter speed may correct this problem.
• A subject that is captured when moving quickly across the
field of view may appear distorted. This is due to the signal
read out format of the image sensor (MOS sensor) and is not
a malfunction.
SHUTTERꢁswitch
ꢁ
2
PressꢁtheꢁSHUTTERꢁswitchꢁtowardsꢁSEL.ꢁ
Repeatꢁthisꢁswitchoverꢁuntilꢁtheꢁdesiredꢁmodeꢁorꢁ
speedꢁappearsꢁonꢁtheꢁLCDꢁmonitorꢁandꢁinꢁtheꢁ
viewfinder.
• The red, blue and green dots that may appear on the screen
at low shutter speeds do not indicate a malfunction.
• If all modes and speeds are available, the display
changes in the following order:
• The bracketed ( ) speeds cannot be selected
when VFR is on.
When SYSTEM MODE is set to 1080-59.94i or
720-59.94P
Forꢁꢂ0iꢁandꢁꢂ0Pꢁrecording
S/S (1/15) (1/30) 1/60
1/250
1/100 1/120
Forꢁ30Pꢁrecording
S/S (1/15) 1/60 1/100
1/250
1/120
Forꢁꢀ4Pꢁrecording
S/S (1/12) 1/60 1/100
1/120 1/250
4ꢄ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Range of variation in each mode
Placing the Camera-recorder in
SYNCHRO SCAN Mode
• The shutter speed in SYNCHRO SCAN mode can be
displayed in either fractional form (sec) or shutter angle
form (deg). To set the display form, use the menu option
SYNC SCAN DISP in the DISPLAY SETUP screen.
ꢁ
1
PressꢁtheꢁSHUTTERꢁswitchꢁpositionedꢁatꢁONꢁ
towardsꢁSEL,ꢁtoꢁplaceꢁtheꢁcamera-recorderꢁinꢁ
SYNCHROꢁSCANꢁ(S/S)ꢁmode.
REC
FORMAT
60P/60i
Setting of SYNC SCAN DISP
sec
deg
1/60.0 – 1/249.8
1/30.0 – 1/249.8
1/24.0 – 1/249.8
1/50.0 – 1/250.0
1/25.0 – 1/250.0
90d - 359.5d
45d - 359.5d
45d - 359.5d
90d - 359.5d
45d - 359.5d
30PN
24PN
50P/50i
25PN
• The shutter speed may vary before and after SYSTEM
MODE switchover.
SYNCHROꢁSCANꢁswitch
SHUTTERꢁswitch
ꢁ
2
InꢁSYNCHROꢁSCANꢁmode,ꢁuseꢁtheꢁSYNCHROꢁ
SCANꢁswitchꢁtoꢁmakeꢁsteplessꢁchangesꢁinꢁtheꢁ
rangeꢁbetweenꢁ1/ꢂ0.0ꢁsꢁandꢁ1/ꢀ4ꢅ.ꢄꢁsꢁ(forꢁꢂ0iꢁ
mode),ꢁorꢁbetweenꢁ1/50.0ꢁandꢁ1/ꢀ50.0ꢁsꢁ(forꢁ50iꢁ
mode).
•ꢁꢁHoldꢁdownꢁtheꢁSYNCHROꢁSCANꢁswitchꢁtoꢁspeedꢁ
upꢁtheꢁrateꢁofꢁshutterꢁspeedꢁchanges.
Ifꢁshutterꢁspeedꢁchangesꢁstopꢁbeforeꢁtheꢁdesiredꢁ
shutterꢁspeedꢁhasꢁbeenꢁreached,ꢁpressꢁagainꢁtoꢁ
continueꢁchangingꢁshutterꢁspeeds.
4ꢅ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Assigning Functions to USER Buttons
The USER MAIN, USER1, and USER2 buttons can be
assigned user-selected functions.
Use the menu options USER MAIN, USER1, and USER2 to
assign functions to respective button. Select these items
from the setting menu SW MODE screen.
SW MODE
LOW GAIN
MID GAIN
HIGH GAIN
USER MAIN
USER1
0dB
6dB
12dB
PUSH AF
Y GET
SHOT MARK
REC CHECK
MIX/R
USER2
RET
LCD/EVF
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
Selectable Functions
• PUSH AF:
Assigns temporal auto focusing while holding
the PUSH AF button down.
•Y GET:
Assigns a function that displays the brightness
level at the center of the image.
• SHOT MARK:
Assigns the shot marker function.
• REC CHECK:
Assigns the REC CHECK function.
• R CONV:
Assigns a function that controls the convergence
point adjustment from the extension control
unit (AG-EC4G) connected to the REMOTE
connector. (USER MAIN and USER1 buttons
only)
• 3D A.Z WFM:
Assigns a 3D assist function Z.WFM.
• 3D A.ALERT:
Assigns a 3D assist function ALERT.
• 3D A.CONV.:
Assigns a 3D assist function CONV.
NOTE
The default settings are listed below.
• USER MAIN:
• USER1:
PUSH AF
Y GET
• USER2:
SHOT MARK
50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting Audio Input Signals and Adjusting Recording Levels
This camera supports independent four-channel audio
recording in any format.
Use the AUDIO SETUP screen in the setting menu to make
detailed audio settings.
When the AUDIO SELECT CH1/CH2 switch is positioned at
AUTO, the recording levels for Audio Channels 1 and 2 are
automatically adjusted. To manually adjust the recording
levels, position the switch at MAN.
A setting menu allows you set the recording levels for
Audio Channels 3 and 4 either to automatic adjustment or
manual mode.
AUDIO SETUP
FRONT VR CH1
FRONT VR CH2
MIC LOWCUT CH1
MIC LOWCUT CH2
MIC LOWCUT CH3
MIC LOWCUT CH4
LIMITER CH1
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
LIMITER CH2
Selecting Audio Input Signals
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
The input signals to be recorded on Audio Channels 1, 2,
3, and 4 are selected with the AUDIO IN switch.
For more information, see [Audio (input) Function Section]
(page 17).
Adjusting Recording Levels
To adjust the recording levels for Audio Channels 1 and 2,
follow the steps below.
a
ꢁ
1
PositionꢁtheꢁMONITORꢁSELECTꢁCH1/ꢀ,ꢁCH3/4-
selectorꢁswitchꢁatꢁCH1/ꢀꢁsoꢁthatꢁtheꢁaudioꢁlevelꢁ
meterꢁonꢁtheꢁdisplayꢁwindowꢁwillꢁprovideꢁCH1ꢁ
andꢁCHꢀꢁindications.ꢁEnsureꢁthatꢁtheꢁchannelꢁ
indicationsꢁdisplayedꢁinꢁtheꢁwindowꢁareꢁ1ꢁandꢁꢀ.
c d
ꢁ
ꢁ
PositionꢁtheꢁAUDIOꢁSELECTꢁCH1/CHꢀꢁswitchꢁ
atꢁMAN.
2
Whileꢁcheckingꢁtheꢁaudioꢁlevelꢁmeterꢁonꢁtheꢁ
LCDꢁmonitorꢁandꢁinꢁtheꢁviewfinder,ꢁadjustꢁtheꢁ
AUDIOꢁLEVELꢁCH1/CHꢀꢁcontrol.
3
e b
• Note that if the level exceeds the top bar (0 dB),
the word OVER illuminates to show that the input
level is excessive. Adjust so that maximum sound
levels do not reach the 0 dB bar.
a
b
c
d
e
AUDIO LEVEL CH1/CH2 controls
AUDIO SELECT CH1/CH2 switch
MONITOR SELECT CH1/3, ST, CH2/4 selector switch
MONITOR SELECT CH1/2, CH3/4 selector switch
AUDIO IN CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4 switch
CH 1
CH 2
OVERꢁindication
When operating the camera without a sound recordist, it is
recommended that the F. AUDIO LEVEL control should be
used to adjust the audio level.
NOTE
The audio signals recorded on the four channels are output as
is (SDI).
In advance, check the level meter on the LCD monitor or
the viewfinder screen and use the F. AUDIO LEVEL control
to adjust the appropriate audio channel to prevent input of
excessive audio signals.
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting Function for the F. AUDIO
LEVEL Control
Use the menu options FRONT VR CH1 and FRONT VR CH2
in the AUDIO SETUP screen to determine whether or not
the F.AUDIO LEVEL control should be enabled. Selecting
an input signal in the menu will enable F. AUDIO LEVEL
control operations for that input signal.
• When the F.AUDIO LEVEL control is set to level 10, it
controls AUDIO LEVEL CH1 and CH2.
AUDIO SETUP
FRONT VR CH1
FRONT VR CH2
MIC LOWCUT CH1
MIC LOWCUT CH2
MIC LOWCUT CH3
MIC LOWCUT CH4
LIMITER CH1
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
LIMITER CH2
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
CH3 and CH4 Recording Levels
Conditions and input levels set in the menu options AUTO
LEVEL CH3 and the AUTO LEVEL CH4 in the AUDIO
SETUP screen change the operation of the audio level of
channels 3 and 4 as shown below. These functions cannot
be manually adjusted.
Each option can be selected in the AUDIO SETUP screen.
Input level
AUTO LEVEL
CH3/CH4
LINE
MIC
ON
OFF
AGC ON
AGC/LIMITER OFF
AGC ON
LIMITER ON
*
AGC: Auto Gain Control
*
5ꢀ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustments and Settings for 3D Recording
Switching the LCD Monitor/
Viewfinder Screen
Equipped with two lenses, this camera shoots and records
the image from the left lens (L) and that from the right lens
(R) separately.
Setting 3D Recording Mode
You can select the 3D recording mode with the 3D MODE
selector switch according to the distance of your subject.
•ꢁNEAR:
for shooting a subject at a short distance.
•ꢁNORMAL:
You can select the image to be displayed on the LCD
monitor and in the viewfinder with the LCD/EVF button.
The following LCD/EVF modes can be switched over each
time you press the LCD/EVF button.
•ꢁNORMAL:
Normally set to this mode (default setting). It allows
smooth zooming operation.
•ꢁEXTRA:
for shooting in telephoto mode. The variable range of
zooming becomes coarse with this mode.
Displays the left-lens (L) image only. This is the normal
display mode automatically set when the camera is
turned on or during playback.
3DꢁMODEꢁselectorꢁswitch
•ꢁMIX:
Displays a mixed image, with the images from the left
lens (L) and the right lens (R) superimposed.
•ꢁRꢁIMAGE:
Displays the right-lens (R) image only. This mode is
used for 3D FINE operation.
•ꢁSIDEꢁbyꢁSIDE:
Displays the left-lens (L) image and the right-lens (R)
image side by side on the same screen.
LCD/EVFꢁbutton
Minimum
object
3D MODE
selector point adjustment
switch
Convergence
Variable
range of
zooming
1
1
*
distance
range
*
1.1 m – 3.4 m
(C00 – C69)
1.7 m – ∞ m
(C31 – C99)
1.7 m – ∞ m
(C31 – C99)
NEAR
Z00 – Z80
Z00 – Z80
Z00 – Z99
0.4 m
NORMAL
EXTRA
0.4 m
0.9 m
1 The convergence point adjustment range and the
minimum object distance are guides for the distance
between the front of the camera and the subject.
*
• The selected LCD/EVF mode is displayed on the screen.
Refer to [21 LCD/EVF mode display] in [Screen displays]
(page 69).
• The images selectable with the LCD/EVF button can be
changed with the menu option LCD/EVF in the SW MODE
screen.
NOTE
The 3D MODE selector switch is disabled in 2D LL recording
mode.The variable range of zooming is fixed to Z00 to Z99.
MIX: NORMAL and MIX modes selectable
MIX/R: NORMAL, MIX and R IMAGE modes selectable
ALL: NORMAL, MIX, R IMAGE and SIDE by SIDE
modes selectable
NOTE
The LCD/EVF button is disabled in 2D LL recording mode.
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the Convergence Point
The convergence point is a point where the optical axes
of the left and right lenses converge. This indicates the
reference plane when viewing a 3D image.
When shooting, adjust the convergence point by shooting
the subject you wish to set on the reference plane so that
the image of the subject from the left lens is completely
superimposed onto that from the right lens.
When viewing 3D image, a subject located closer than the
convergence point is displayed in front of the screen, and
a subject located farther than the convergence point is
displayed behind the screen.
ꢁ
PressꢁtheꢁLCD/EVFꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁsetꢁtoꢁMIXꢁmode.
1
2
ꢁ
TurnꢁtheꢁCONV.ꢁdialꢁtoꢁadjustꢁtheꢁconvergenceꢁ
point.
LCD/EVFꢁbutton
CONV.ꢁdial
• The convergenct position (distance to the
reference plane) is displayed as “C 00” to “C 99”
in the center at the lower part of the screen, The
larger the number, the greater the distance to the
reference plane.
Refer to [10 Convergence position display] in
[Screen displays] (page 69).
• The “Convergence in Green” display of the
3D assist function allows you to check the
convergence point area on the screen.
Refer to [3D Assist Function] (page 56).
NOTE
The CONV. dial is disabled in 2D LL recording mode.
54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What is convergence point adjustment?
What is parallax?
A human’s stereoscopic viewing takes advantage of
the brain’s ability to process information from the left
and right eyes of two images seen from their respective
perspectives. The misalignment of the two images is
called binocular parallax.
Mainly binocular parallax is used by 3D equipment
to create the feeling of stereoscopic images. When
shooting, the images from the left and right lenses are
misaligned because of the difference in the positions of
the lenses as well as in the directions of the optical axes.
This misalignment (called parallax) changes according
to the distance of the subject being shot (illustration at
right).
Convergenceꢁpoint
Left-lensꢁimage
Right-lensꢁimage
If parallax is excessive, it is difficult to fuse the two
images within the brain. This may produce a double
image, create a feeling of strangeness, etc., causing
eyestrain.
Limiting the parallax appropriately during shooting is
important for comfortable 3D viewing.
Are there guidelines for appropriate
parallax?
Parallactigꢁangleꢁinꢁdepth
There are two guidelines for parallax.
A Parallax: 3 % or less the effective width of the screen
It is usually said that a parallactic angle within 1
degree is preferable for comfortable 3D viewing. The
parallactic angle, here, means the difference between
the angle of convergence when a viewer watches a
point on the screen and the angle when he or she
watches an object popped out or recessed from the
screen. A large parallactic angle makes it difficult for
the viewer to perceive a stereoscopic image, causing
eyestrain.
Parallacticꢁangleꢁforꢁpopꢁout
• Extreme parallax between left and
right images is demonstrated in the
illustration above.
Assuming that people view 3D images from a
distance three times the effective height of the screen,
a parallactic angle of 1 degree corresponds to
misalignment of approximately 3 % the effective width
of the screen. This leads to one of the guidelines for
parallax, which is to limit horizontal misalignment to
within 3 % the effective width of the screen.
B Parallax in depth: 50 mm or less
ꢁParallaxꢁforꢁpopꢁout
Parallax: Approx. 3 % or less (any screen size)
Parallax in depth is created when an image from the
right lens is displayed to the right and an image from
the left lens to the left on the screen.
ꢁParallaxꢁinꢁdepth
For a screen of 77-type or less
Parallax: Approx. 3 % or less
If the value of this parallax exceeds the pupil distance
of a viewer, it will cause eyestrain.
In consideration of individual differences of viewers
such as age and pupil distance, setting parallax to
within 50 mm is preferable.
Parallax in depth is related to screen size. For a 16:9
screen, if the screen size is 77-type or less, limiting
parallax to within 3 % the effective width of the screen
means that parallax in depth will not exceed 50 mm.
If the target screen size is 103-type, limit parallax to
2.2 %. For a 200-type screen, limit parallax to 1.1 %.
For a screen of 77-type or more
Parallax: 50 mm or less
How to operate this camera
The 3D assist function of this camera (page 56) provides
a guide of distance ranges from the subject for achieving
appropriate parallax. Referring to the guide, change the
layout of the subject and check the parallax value (%
effective screen width), using a monitor.
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
”Z Waveform” display
3D Assist Function
Pressꢁtheꢁ3DꢁASSISTꢁZꢁWFMꢁbutton.
The waveform displayed on the screen indicates the
amount of pop-out area and receded area.
The ascending waveform shows the receded area, and the
descending waveform the pop-out area.
In order to shoot 3D images safely and comfortably, this
camera is provided with three types of 3D assist function.
• The 3D assist function is enabled when the LCD/EVF
mode is set to left-lens (L) image only or mixed left-lens
(L) and right-lens (R) image. Press the LCD-EVF button
so that the LCD/EVF mode display is none or MIX on the
LCD monitor/viewfinder screen.
a b c
Waveform
Press the 3D ASSIST Z WFM button again to turn off the
waveform display.
• You can set the level of pop-out area and receded area
in the 3D ASSIST screen to check visually if the 3D image
you are shooting produces your intended effect.
”Parallax Alert” display
Pressꢁtheꢁ3DꢁASSISTꢁALERTꢁbutton.
Red blocks indicate an alert area where the subject will
excessively pop out from the screen, and yellow blocks
indicate an alert area where the subject will excessively
recede in depth from the screen.
a 3D ASSIST Z WFM button
b 3D ASSIST ALERT button
c 3D ASSIST CONV. button
This is to help you to shoot natural 3D images.
”Convergence in Green” display
Yellowꢁblocksꢁindicateꢁexcessivelyꢁ
recededꢁareas
Pressꢁtheꢁ3DꢁASSISTꢁCONV.ꢁbutton.
The message “3 D ASSIST CONV. ON” is displayed on the
screen for three seconds.
Green blocks indicate the area in which the subject is on
the reference plane for the 3D image (convergence point).
You can visually confirm the surface of the screen while
shooting, to achieve effective 3D expression.
3D ASSIST
ALERT ON
Greenꢁblocksꢁindicateꢁtheꢁreferenceꢁplaneꢁarea.
Redꢁblocksꢁindicateꢁexcessivelyꢁ
pop-outꢁareas
3D ASSIST
CONV. ON
Press the 3D ASSIST ALERT button again to turn off the red
and yellow blocks.
• You can set the alert level for pop-out areas and receded
areas, respectively, with the menu options NEAR LEVEL
and FAR LEVEL in the 3D ASSIST screen.
Press the 3D ASSIST CONV. button again to turn off the
green blocks.
NOTE
Blocks are not displayed for subjects extremely receded or
popped out.
5ꢂ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTE
Adjustment between Two Lenses
(3D FINE Function)
As the left and right lenses are linked, you normally do not
have to adjust them.
If you wish to perform fine adjustments between the two
lenses, the 3D FINE function allows you to adjust the
vertical position of the images, focus, and iris.
When the SHIFT button is pressed, the functions of the
menu/thumbnail operation buttons change for the 3D FINE
function.
• The 3D assist function is disabled when the LCD/EVF mode
is set to MIX, SIDE or R IMAGE.
• The 3D ASSIST buttons are disabled in 2D LL recording
mode.
• Any 3D recording of a flat image or repetitive pattern may not
be reproduced with correct depth information.
NOTE
• The 3D FINE screen is not displayed during recording.
Perform the 3D FINE adjustment before recording.
• The appropriate adjustment range varies depending on
the zoom position. If you have changed the zoom position,
perform readjustment.
d
c
b a
a SHIFT (3D FINE) button
b Cursor and SET (RESET) buttons
c EXIT (IRIS) button
d THUMBNAIL (IRIS) button
ꢁ
Performꢁzoom,ꢁfocus,ꢁand/orꢁbrightnessꢁ
adjustment.
1
2
3
ꢁ
ꢁ
PressꢁtheꢁSHIFTꢁ(3DꢁFINE)ꢁbutton.
The fine adjustment screen is displayed.
Adjustꢁtheꢁfollowingꢁfineꢁadjustmentsꢁasꢁ
necessary.
Vertical position of the images (VERTICAL)
Press the cursor button r or e. The image from the
right lens moves downwards by pressing r, and
upwards by pressing e.
5ꢃ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTE
This product is preadjusted at the factory to minimize
vertical misalignment. 1 The specification for vertical
*
misalignment is 1.2 % or less.
1 It is indicated in percentage of vertical
*
misalignment between the images from the
left and right lenses at the center of the screen
according to the effective height of the screen,
when measured under the following conditions:
the zoom position at the maximum wide angle
(Z00), the convergence point in the center (C50),
and shooting a subject at a distance of 4.3 m.
Focus (FOCUS)
Press the cursor button or . The focal length
for the right lens is increased if you press , and is
reduced if you press .
Iris (IRIS)
Press the EXIT (IRIS) or THUMBNAIL (IRIS) button.
The iris of the right lens is opened if you press
EXIT (IRIS), and is closed if you press THUMBNAIL
(IRIS).
NOTE
• Holding the SET (RESET) button pressed during the 3D FINE
adjustment resets all the adjusted values.
• The 3D FINE function is disabled in 2D LL recording mode.
• The appropriate adjustment area varies depending on the
zoom position. Perform the fine adjustments again if the
zoom position is changed.
5ꢄ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Time Data
The camera provides time data such as time codes, user
bits, time of day (real-time) data, which is recorded on each
frame alongside video data. It is also recorded as as data
in clip metadata files.
Time data overview
Time code
Use the TCG switch to select Rec Run or Free Run mode.
• Free Run: The time code advances constantly whether
the camera is on or not just like time itself. Recording
using a slave-locked time code input to the TC IN
connector is also possible.
• Rec Run: The time code advances only during recording.
This will enable continuation of time codes in previously
recorded clips and when the power is turned off or new
P2 cards are inserted to continue recording.
NOTE
The following events will disrupt time code continuity.
• When clips are deleted
• When 24PN or 30PN (25PN) is selected
• When a recording is interrupted by a REC WARNING or other
abnormality
User bits
• Two types of user bits are provided internally: LTC and
VITC.
• LTC user bits enable the recording of user settings, time,
date, time codes and similar values, the frame rate data
for camera capture and external input values (via TC
IN connector input). They are output from the TC OUT
connector or output as LTC embedded in HD SDI.
• VITC user bits record the frame rate data of camera
capture. They are output as VITC embedded in HD SDI.
• The user bits in clip metadata record the LTC UB value at
the start of recording.
Date (real time)
• The built-in clock calculates the year, month, day and
time from the internal clock to display on video output
on the LCD monitor, in the viewfinder, or embedded in
MONITOR OUT.
• The internal clock is not only used to calculate the free
run time code when the power is off and to set the user
bit year, date and time, but also to set file creation dates
when clips are recorded that determine the order of
thumbnails and playback order.
• It is also used for generating clip metadata and UMID
(Unique Material Identifier).
For details, see [Setting Date and Time of Internal Clock]
(page 28).
5ꢅ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording Time Codes and User Bits
Displayed
TC
Menu setting
Recorded TC Output TC
Recorded UB
LTC VITC
Output UB
Recording
format
LTC UB
TC/tc
(24/30
conversion)
TC OUT
VITC UB
embedded
in HD SDI
SYSTEM
MODE FORMAT RATE
REC
FRAME
HD
SDI
embedded
LTC VITC TC OUT
connector
in HD
UB
UB
1
UB
*
1
SDI
*
AVC-I
100/60i
–
–
100/60i
R-RUN
AVC-I 50/60i
2
F-RUN
TC:30F
tc:24F
UB
MODE
FRAME
RATE
*
LTC UB
DF/NDF
30 frames
AVC-I
100/30PN
AVC-I
100/30PN
1080-
59.94i
FRAME
RATE
50/30PN
Recording
24F
LTC UB
OVER 60i
output
1080/
24F(LTC) 30F
conversion
–
–
–
–
Playback
TC:24F
tc:30F
–
–
→
6
24PN
*
Recording
24F
Playback
TC:24F
tc:30F
AVC-I
100/24PN
AVC-I
R-RUN
4
7
1080-
23.98PsF
F-RUN
NDF
UB
MODE
FRAME
RATE
FRAME
RATE
* *
1080/24PN
LTC UB
LTC UB
50/24PN
24 frames
Over
than 24
frames
24
frames
2
R-RUN F-RUN
*
AVC-I
100/60P
AVC-I
DF/NDF 30 frames
720/60P
4
R-RUN F-RUN
*
50/60P
NDF locked 30 frames
3
TC:30F
tc:24F
R-RUN F-RUN
NDF locked
*
30
frames
720/30PN
AVC-I
100/30PN
AVC-I
Every active frame 30 frames
R-RUN locked Matches recorder
Over
than 30 720/30PN
frames
DF/NDF
TC at start of
recording
50/30PN
720-
59.94P
UB
UB
FRAME
RATE
Every active
MODE
MODE
frame 30 frames
30 frames/s
R-RUN
5
F-RUN
*
24
LTC 30F
LTC UB
→
OVER
720/24PN
frames
NDF locked
Every active
frame 24 frames
LTC
Recording
24F
Playback
TC:24F
tc:30F
conversion
60P output
AVC-I
100/24PN
AVC-I
R-RUN locked Matches recorder
50/24PN
Over
than 24 720/24PN
frames
NDF locked
Every active
TC at start of
recording
frame 24 frames
30 frames/s
AVC-I
100/50i
AVC-I
–
–
1080/50i
R-RUN
50/50i
1080-
50i
UB
MODE
FRAME
RATE
FRAME
RATE
2
F-RUN
TC:25F
LTC UB
*
AVC-I
100/25PN
AVC-I
25 frames
1080/30PN
720/50PN
50/25PN
50
frames
AVC-I
100/50P
AVC-I
R-RUN
2
F-RUN
*
Over
than 50 720/50PN
frames
25 frames
50/50P
720-
50P
UB
UB
FRAME
RATE
R-RUN
TC:25F
LTC UB
25
3
MODE
MODE
720/25PN
frames
F-RUN
*
AVC-I
100/25PN
AVC-I
Every active frame 25 frames
Matches recorder
R-RUN locked
TC at start of
Over
than 25 720/25PN
frames
50/25PN
Every active
recording
frame 25 frames
25 frames/s
1
When UB MODE is FRM. RATE, playback of native clips is the pulldown frame rate read from VITC UB.
In Free Run mode, it is slaved to the time code input to the TC IN connector.
*
*
*
*
*
2
3
4
5
In Free Run mode, it is slaved to the time code input to the TC IN connector. But not slaved to it during recording.
In Free Run mode, it is slaved when TC input to the TC IN connector is non-drop frame. But not slaved to it during recording.
In Free Run mode, it is slaved to the time code input to the TC IN connector, whose value is converted to 24 frames
when it was NDF 30 frames. But not slaved to it during recording.
6
When playing back the data recorded in 1080/23.98PsF format with 1080/59.94i
The signal converted from 24F (LCT) into 30F is output from MONITOR OUT.
*
*
7
ꢂ0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting User Bits
Use the setting menu UB MODE on the RECORDING
SETUP screen to select the user bits to record in the LCT
area.
Entering the User Bits
The user bits allow information, including memos that use
up to eight-digit hexadecimal numbers (date and time), to
be recorded in the Subcode area.
•ꢁUSER:
a b
Records internal user values.
To set user values, set the TCG switch to SET to open
the setting menu UB PRESET screen.
Set values are retained after the power is turned off.
See also [Entering the User Bits] (this page).
•ꢁTIME:
Records the time calculated by the internal clock.
•ꢁDATE:
Records the year, month and day time digits from the
internal clock.
•ꢁEXT:ꢁ
Records the user bits input to the TC IN connector.
•ꢁTCG:
Records the time code value.
•ꢁFRM.ꢁRATE:
Records the frame rate information of camera capture.
A native recorded clip is played back at the same frame
rate as the VITC UB regardless of recorded values. Use
this setting when a PC or other editing device is to use
the user bit frame rate.
d c
a
b
c
d
COUNTER button
For details, see [Frame rate information recorded in
user bits] (page 62).
RESET button
TCG switch
• To slave lock to the user bits input to the TC IN connector,
set to EXT.
Cursor and SET buttons
• In slave mode, the UB indicator is highlighted.
• A slave relationship, once started, continues even after
input from the TC IN connector ends. Note that the
following events release user bit slave status.
• When a UB MODE option is set to something other than
EXT.
• When UB PRESET is performed
• Turning the power off.
The internal user value retains the slave values even after
slave release.
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
SetꢁtheꢁCOUNTERꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁUB.
PositionꢁtheꢁTCGꢁswitchꢁatꢁSET.
1
2
3
Useꢁtheꢁcursorꢁbuttonsꢁtoꢁsetꢁtheꢁuserꢁbits.
UB PRESET
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
+/- : PUSH
SEL : PUSH
/
/
PRESET : PUSH SET
q button: Shifts the target (highlighted) digit to the
right.
w button: Shifts the target (highlighted) digit to the
left.
e button: Increases the highlighted number by one.
r button: Decreases the highlighted number by
one.
• Pressing the RESET button while setting the user
bits will reset any user bit setting to 0.
ꢂ1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10ꢄ0iꢁmode
ꢁ
4
PressꢁtheꢁSETꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁconfirmꢁtheꢁuserꢁbitꢁ
value,ꢁandꢁpositionꢁtheꢁTCGꢁswitchꢁatꢁF-RUNꢁorꢁ
R-RUN.
Frameꢁrate:ꢁꢀ4Pꢁoverꢁꢂ0iꢁ(ꢀ:3)
First field of updated frame rate
Time code digit
00 01 02 03 04 05 06
23 24 25 26 27 28 29
NOTE
Changing the TCG switch setting without pressing the
SET button disables the set value.
Video
Ao Ae Bo Be Bo Ce Co De Do De Ao Ae Bo Be
Co De Do De Ao Ae Bo Be Bo Ce Co De Do De
Sequence No.
0
1
2
3
4
0
1
3
4
0
1
2
3
4
ꢁ
5
OpenꢁtheꢁsettingꢁmenuꢁRECORDINGꢁSETUPꢁ
screenꢁandꢁsetꢁtheꢁmenuꢁoptionꢁUBꢁMODEꢁtoꢁ
USER.
Updated frame information
10 10 01 01 00 10 10
01 00 10 10 01 01 00
Frameꢁrate:ꢁꢁ30PsFꢁ
ꢀ5PsF
Retaining the user bits
Time code digit
00 01 02
The data set for the user bits are automatically saved and
retained even if the video camera-recorder is turned off.
Video
Ao Ae Bo Be Co Ce
Frame rate information recorded in user
bits
Updated frame information
10 10 10
The frame rate value of video data captured and recorded
at a frame rate set in the menu option FRAME RATE
or other options in the SYSTEM SETUP screen can be
recorded in the user bits and be used in editing equipment
(computer editing software).
ꢃꢀ0Pꢁmode
Frameꢁrate:ꢁꢀ4Pꢁoverꢁꢂ0Pꢁ(ꢀ:3)
Updated frame
This type of data is recorded in VITC UB at all times.
Setting the setting menu UB MODE to FRM.RATE, records
the information also to the user bits.
In playback of clips recorded in native mode, the same
frame rate information as that obtained in playing back the
user bits in the VIDEO AUX area is also output to the user
bits in the subcode area.
Time code digit
00 01 02 03 04 05 06
23 24 25 26 27 28 29
C D D D A A B B B C C D D D
01 00 10 10 01 01 00
Video
A A B B B C C D D D A A B B
Updated frame information
10 10 01 01 00 10 10
Frame rate information
Frameꢁrate:ꢁꢁ30PꢁOverꢁꢂ0Pꢁ(ꢀ:ꢀ)ꢁꢁ
ꢀ5PꢁOverꢁ50Pꢁ(ꢀ:ꢀ)
Frame rate, video pull-down and time code user bits are
related as described below.
Time code digit
00 01 02
Video
A A B B C C
Verificationꢁ
Fixedꢁ
Mediaꢁmanagementꢁdata
•ꢁꢁUpdateꢁframeꢁflag,ꢁactiveꢁ
frameꢁflag
informationꢁon value
theꢁright-hand
sixꢁdigits
Updated frame information
10 10 10
•ꢁRꢁ ECꢁmark
SecquenceꢁNo.ꢁlockedꢁatꢁFh
Cameraꢁcaptureꢁmode
Example:
•ꢁꢂ0i:ꢁꢂ00
•ꢁꢂ0P:ꢁꢂ0ꢄ
•ꢁ30P:ꢁ30ꢄ
•ꢁꢀ4P:ꢁꢀ4ꢄ
•ꢁꢀ4PN:ꢁꢀ4Cꢁ(recording)
•ꢁ50i:ꢁ50ꢀ
•ꢁ50P:ꢁ50A
•ꢁꢀ5P:ꢁꢀ5A
•ꢁP:ꢁꢅꢁ(ꢃꢀ0P/30PNꢁorꢁꢂ0PꢁVFR)
•ꢁP:ꢁDꢁ(ꢃꢀ0P/ꢀ4PNꢁVFRꢁrecording)
•ꢁP:ꢁBꢁ(ꢃꢀ0P/ꢀ5PNꢁorꢁ50PꢁVFR)
ꢂꢀ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ꢁ
5
PressꢁtheꢁSETꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁconfirmꢁtheꢁtimeꢁcodeꢁ
setting,ꢁandꢁuseꢁtheꢁTCGꢁswitchꢁtoꢁselectꢁaꢁtimeꢁ
code.
Setting the Time Code
ꢁ
1
SwitchꢁtheꢁmenuꢁoptionꢁTCꢁMODEꢁonꢁtheꢁ
RECORDINGꢁSETUPꢁscreenꢁtoꢁDFꢁorꢁNDFꢁ
usingꢁtheꢁmenus.ꢁ(Inꢁ5ꢅ.ꢅ4ꢁHzꢁmode)
• F-RUN steps the time code in free run mode, and
R-RUN set it in recording run mode.
NOTE
For details on menu operation, refer to [Using the
Menus] (page 106).
• The time code is adjusted to multiples of four
for 24PN and to even numbers for 720/30PN. It is
adjusted so that the seconds plus the frames are an
even number for 720/25PN.The time code cannot be
set during recording.
• Select DF to advance time code in drop frame
mode and NDF in non-drop frame mode. Note that
the unit always operates in NDF mode when 50 Hz
is selected in SYSTEM MODE (1080-50i or 720-
50P), or 24PN is set when 60 Hz is selected (1080-
59/94i or 720-59.94P).
• The set value is not valid if you change the TCG
switch position without pressing the SET button.
Time code function during battery
replacement
ꢁ
2
UseꢁtheꢁCOUNTERꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁswitchꢁtoꢁtimeꢁ
codeꢁdisplay.
Even during battery replacement the backup mechanism
keeps the time code generator functioning.
ꢁ
ꢁ
PositionꢁtheꢁTCGꢁswitchꢁatꢁSET.
NOTE
3
When the POWER switch has been switched ON OFF
ON, the backup accuracy of the time code in free run mode is
about ±2 frames.
Useꢁtheꢁcursorꢁbuttonsꢁtoꢁsetꢁtheꢁtimeꢁcode.
4
• Range of available time code settings:
In case of 60 Hz
00:00:00:00 to 23:59:59:29 (other than 24PN)
00:00:00:00 to 23:59:59:23 (24PN)
In case of 50 Hz
00:00:00:00 to 23:59:59:24
TC PRESET
REC RUN
00 h 00 m 00 s 00
h
min
s
frm
+/- : PUSH
/
SEL : PUSH
/
PRESET : PUSH SET
q button: Shifts the target (highlighted) digit to the
right.
w button: Shifts the target (highlighted) digit to the
left.
e button: Increases the highlighted number by one.
r button: Decreases the highlighted number by
one.
• Pressing the RESET button will reset any time
code setting to 0.
ꢂ3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VFR (variable frame rate) time code
• In 24PN mode, recording is performed at 24-frame time code, and output is performed at 30-frame time code to match
the 2:3 pull-down scheme used for video output.
• At a frame rate (capture frame rate) of 24P in 24PN mode, the speed of recording and the output time code matches
actual time, but not at any speed other than 24P. (Example: at 60P recording progresses at 60/24 speed)
• Then the camera operates in Rec Run mode and the time code output at start of recording matches the recording time
code.
• This is true also for frame rates other than 30P capture in 30PN mode and 25P capture in 25PN mode.
ꢀ4PNꢁrecordingꢁatꢁꢂ0Pꢁcapture
Rec start
Rec stop
Rec start
Video output
0
1
2
3
22 23 24 25
58 59 60 61 62 63
67 68
Output time code
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:01
00:11
00:12
00:29
01:00
01:01
02:20
02:20
Skips
Recorded video
24/30
conversion
0
1
2
3
22 23 24 25
58 59 60 61 62 63
67 68
Recorded time code
00:00 00:01 00:02 00:03
00:22 00:23 01:00 01:01
02:10 02:11 02:12 02:13 02:14 02:15
02:16
02:16 02:17
ꢀ5PNꢁrecordingꢁatꢁ50Pꢁcapture
Rec start
Rec stop
Rec start
Video output
0
1
2
3
3
22 23 24 25
48 49 50 51 52 53
57 58
Output time code
00:00
00:00
00:01
00:11
00:12
00:24
01:00
01:01
02:04
02:04
57 58
02:04 02:05
Skips
Recorded video
0
1
2
22 23 24 25
48 49 50 51 52 53
Recorded time code
00:00 00:01 00:02 00:03
00:22 00:23 00:24 01:00
01:23 01:24 02:00 02:01 02:02 02:03 02:04
30PNꢁrecordingꢁatꢁ15Pꢁcapture
Rec start
Rec stop
Rec start
Video output
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
14 14 14 14 15 15 15 15
20 20 20 20 21 21
Output time code
00:00
00:00
0
00:01
00:02
1
00:03
00:28
00:29
01:00
00:16
00:16
00:17
Skips
Recorded video
14
15
21
Recorded time code
00:00
00:01
00:14
00:15
00:16
00:16
ꢀ5PNꢁrecordingꢁatꢁ15Pꢁcapture
Rec start
Rec stop
Rec start
Video output
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
2
13 13 13 14 14 14 15 15
19 19 19 19 20 20 20 21 21
Output time
code
00:00
00:00
00:01
00:02
00:03
00:22
00:23
00:24
01:01
00:16
00:16
00:16
00:17
00:18
Recorded
video
Skips
0
1
2
13
14
15
20
21
Recorded time
code
00:00
00:03
00:02
00:13
00:14
00:15
00:16
00:16
00:17
ꢂ4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTE
Externally Locking the Time Code
The time code generator built into your camera may be
locked to an external generator. It is also possible to lock
an external time code generator to the internal generator.
When the system mode is 1080/23.98PsF, use the HD signal of
23.98PsF as a reference signal and input a 24-frame time code
to the TC IN connector.
To externally lock the time code
Connections for externally locking the
time code (examples)
Follow the steps below.
As illustrated, both the reference video signals and the time
code must be input.
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
TurnꢁonꢁtheꢁPOWERꢁswitch.
1
2
3
4
PositionꢁtheꢁTCGꢁswitchꢁatꢁF-RUN.
SetꢁtheꢁCOUNTERꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁTC.
Example 1 : Locking the time code to
external signals
TCꢁIN
Referenceꢁtimeꢁ
code
Supplyꢁaꢁphase-relationshipꢁreferenceꢁ
timeꢁcodeꢁ(thatꢁconformsꢁtoꢁtheꢁtimeꢁcodeꢁ
requirements)ꢁandꢁreferenceꢁvideoꢁsignalsꢁ
toꢁtheꢁTCꢁINꢁandꢁGENLOCKꢁINꢁconnectors,ꢁ
respectively.
Referenceꢁvideoꢁ
signal
GENLOCKꢁIN
• Now the built-in time code generator is locked to the
reference time code.
• When locked to an external time code generator, the
time code is at all times locked to the external time code,
which is displayed as a highlighted value on the counter
indicator. Do not engage the recording mode during the
few seconds it takes for the sync generator to stabilize.
• Once a slave relationship is established, the TC IN and
NOTE
• Use an HDY reference signal as reference video signal.
• During HD-Y signal input in 720P system mode, GENLOCK
input for the video signal is applied but the time code is
delayed by 1 field.
1
GENLOCK IN connectors stay in slave status.
*
• If the reference GENLOCK input signal becomes irregular,
recording cannot be performed normally and the continuity
of the time code cannot be guaranteed. When the reference
GENLOCK input signal becomes irregular, the unit resets the
L/R section of the camera and is restarted.
Note that the following events release slave status.
• When TC PRESET is performed
• The power is turned off
• The time code mode is switched
• The TCG switch is set to R-RUN
• When REC FORMAT has been switched
(During this process, the image is disturbed.)
• The input signal of the RETURN IN connector can be locked
externally if the menu option GENLOCK SEL in the OTHER
FUNCTIONS screen is set to RETURN IN.
1 The slave status locks the time code to the TC IN input
and the device will use this time code even if time
code input should subsequently cease.
*
Example 2 : Locking the time code of this
unit and external equipment to
the time code from an external
time code generator
Setting the user bits when the time code
is externally locked
To externally lock user bits, set the setting menu UB MODE
(RECORDING SETUP screen) to EXT.
Regardless of an F-RUN or R-RUN setting of the TCG
switch, the time code is slaved to user bit values input to
the TC IN connector.
Referenceꢁvideoꢁ
signal
TCꢁIN
Externalꢁtimeꢁcodeꢁ
For details, refer to [Setting Time Data] (page 59) and
[Setting User Bits] (page 61).
generator
GENLOCKꢁIN
To unlock the externally locked time code
Discontinue external time code supply, then position the
TCG switch at R-RUN.
ꢂ5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cautions in switching the power source
from battery to external power supply
Counter Setting and Display
Pressing the COUNTER button to view the counter displays
the counter value on the time code indicator on the
LCD monitor and in the viewfinder. The counter value is
indicated in “Hour : Minute : Second” format. The counter
value is not displayed during playback.
Connect the DC IN socket with the external power supply
before removing the battery, in order to keep the time code
generator energized. If the battery is removed first, there is
no guarantee that the time code will stay externally locked.
The menu option REC COUNTER in the DISPLAY SETUP
screen can be set to display two types of counters.
TOTAL: provides a continuous count until reset by
pressing the COUNTER RESET button. The
External synchronisation of the camera
when the time code is externally locked
When the time code is externally locked, the reference
video signals input through the GENLOCK IN connector
gen-lock the camera.
counter value is retained when P2 cards are
replaced and when the power is turned off.
CLIP:
The counter is reset to 0 at the start of each
recording and allows you to keep track of clip
recording time while shooting the current clip.
NOTE
• To lock other devices externally to the AG-3DP1, as the
master device, make sure that the other devices are in
the same mode as the AG-3DP1. Note that if some of the
connected devices use interlaced scanning while other
devices use progressive scanning, there may be breaks in
the video and time code.
NOTE
• Pressing the RESET button when the counter value is
displayed resets the counter to 0.
• The counter value indicates values in the range between
0:00:00 and 9:59:59 in 1-second steps.
• To externally lock at 24PN (Native Recording), be sure to
input a non-dropframe time code. External lock using a drop
frame time code is not possible.
ꢂꢂ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LCD Monitor/Viewfinder Screen Status Displays
In addition to video, the LCD monitor and viewfinder show
messages indicating camera settings and operating status,
center markers, safety zone markers, zebra patterns and
other indications.
Status Indication Layout
The illustration below shows the indications (except MODE
CHECK) that are displayed on the LCD monitor and in the
viewfinder.
T C 1 2 : 3 4 : 5 6 : 2 3
P 2
L R
P AUS E
9 9 9 min 1 3 . 5 V
SCENE 6
F U L L
R
I MAGE
2 D L L
1 0 8 0 i
100
AVC-I
60
P 3.2K
1 2
ND 1
dB
FOCUS BAR
T EMP + 7
C
1 0 9% ND 1
NOV 1 6 2 0 1 1 1 2 : 3 4 : 5 6
6 0 : 2 4 PN
C
0 0
MF 9 9
Z 9 9
CH 1
CH 2
= = = = = = = =
1/1 2 3 . 4
C L OSE
For more information, see the following pages:
Selecting Display Information
To select items, open the DISPLAY SETUP screen and turn
on or off each item or type.
Refer to the section [Using the Menus] (page 106).
DISPLAY SETUP
EVF PEAK LEVEL
EVF PEAK FREQ
LCD SETTING
LCD BACKLIGHT
ZEBRA1 DETECT
ZEBRA2 DETECT
ZEBRA2
0
LOW
>>>
NORMAL
70%
85%
SPOT
ON
MARKER
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
ꢂꢃ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Screen Displays
26 25
24
23
T C 1 2 : 3 4 : 5 6 : 2 3
P 2
L R
P AUS E
9 9 9 min 1 3 . 5 V
SCENE 6
1
2
3
F U L L
22
21
R
I MAGE
2 D L L
1 0 8 0 i
100
AVC-I
4
5
20
60
19
18
17
16
15
P 3.2K
1 2
dB
6
7
FOCUS BAR
T EMP + 7
C
ND 1
1 0 9% ND 1
NOV 1 6 2 0 1 1 1 2 : 3 4 : 5 6
6 0 : 2 4 PN
C
0 0
MF 9 9 14
Z 9 9
8
9
CH 1
CH 2
= = = = = = = =
1/1 2 3 . 4
C L OSE
10
11
12
13
When the HOLD button is used to temporarily freeze
indications, the HOLD indication blinks.
1
Time code displays
Each press of the COUNTER button displays (or turns
off) the indications listed below.
• (No indication)
2
Warnings
P2
•
:
Blinks when no P2 card is inserted or the
card is write protected.
• Counter:
P2
Counter value (during recording only)
•
FULL:
• TC:
• tc:
Time code value
Blinks when a P2 card has insufficient space
The colon between the seconds and the
frames changes to a period (.) in drop frame
mode.
Time code value (frame digits are indicated
in 24 frames)
The colon between the seconds and the
frames changes to a period (.) in drop frame
mode.
for recording or the number of clips on a P2
card has reached the limit for the number of
clips that can be recorded on one P2 card.
Blinks when the battery for the internal clock
is depleted.
•
:
For details, refer to [Charging the Internal
Battery] (page 126).
3
4
2D LL display
Indicates that the 2D LL recording mode is set.
• UB:
• FR:
User bit values
Frame rate information for recording
Recording format and system frequency indication
• System mode
• FR60I: 60i interlace mode (60 fields/s)
• FR60P: 60P progressive mode (60 frames/s)
• FR30P: 30P progressive mode (30 frames/s)
• FR24P: 24P progressive mode (24 frames/s)
• FR50I: 50i interlace mode (50 fields/s)
• FR50P: 50P progressive mode (50 fields/s)
• FR25P: 25P progressive mode (25 fields/s)
: In FR24P mode, the last digit contains the frame
conversion sequence information.
• 1080i
• 1080
• 720P
• Recording format
• AVC-I 100: AVC-Intra 100 format
• AVC-I 50: AVC-Intra 50 format
• System frequency
60
50
24
•
•
•
: 59.94 Hz
: 50 Hz
: 23.98 Hz
NOTE
When TC, tc and UB are locked to TC IN input, the characters in
TC
TC
their icons change to outline characters
.
ꢂꢄ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
Information display
The following information is displayed depending on the
situation.
15 Calendar
Month:
JAN (January), FEB (February),
MAR (March), APR (April), MAY (May),
JUN (June), JUL(July), AUG (August),
SEP (September), OCT (October),
NOV (November), DEC (December)
Day of the month
• Performance of auto white balance and auto black
balance
• Warning and error indication
• Information on switch and button operations
For details, refer to [Center Information Display]
(page 70).
Year: 2000 – 2037
Hours
6 FOCUS BAR display
Minutes
Indicates the focusing status when the menu option
FOCUS BAR in the DISPLAY SETUP screen is set to
ON.
Seconds
mmm dd yyyy hh:mm:ss
7
8
Y GET brightness display
16 Recommended ND filter display
This indicates the most suitable ND filter to use under
current shooting conditions.
When the Y GET function is used, the image level at the
center of the image is indicated in a range between 0%
and 109%
17 ND filter display
Recording/playback frame rate display
In native recording, the capture frame rate and
recording and playback frame rates are displayed.
Example: 60:24PN (recording 60P with the camera
frame rate set to a variable frame rate of
24PN)
This indicates the selected ND filter.
18 Gain display
Indicates the gain value set using the video amplifier.
19 WHITE BAL switch position indication
Indicates the currently selected switch position and also
white balance operation when AWB is preset.
In standard recording only the capture frame rate is
indicated in playback.
20 C TEMP (color temperature) display
The color temperature value is displayed in the range of
–7 to +7 after the auto white balance adjustment.
9
Audio level meter display
HEADꢁROOMꢁ atꢁ-ꢀ0ꢁdB
-20dB
0dB
21 LCD/EVF mode display
CH 1
CH 2
Indicates the image displayed on the LCD monitor and
in the viewfinder.
HEADꢁROOMꢁ atꢁ-1ꢄꢁdB
• No display: Left-lens (L) image
This mode is set automatically when the power is
turned on.
• MIX: Mixed image of the left-lens (L) image and right-
lens (R) image
• SIDE: Side by side display of the left-lens (L) image
and right-lens (R) image
• R IMAGE: Right-lens (R) image
-18dB
0dB
CH 1
CH 2
10 Convergence position display
Indicates the convergence position (distance of the
reference plane for a 3D image) with C00 to C99. The
higher the number, the greater the distance.
• Use this display as a rough gauide.
11 Shutter speed
22 Scene file name display
The shutter speed is displayed here.
In synchro scan mode, the display (time (minutes)
display or shutter angle icon display) made in the menu
option SYNC SCAN DISP in the DISPLAY SETUP screen
is used.
Indicates the name of currently selected SCENE FILE
(F1 to F6). No indication appears when a scene file
name is not assigned.
23 Remaining battery charge
As the remaining battery charge drops, the display
12 Iris display
changes as follows:
.
Displays F values.
When the battery is completely discharged,
) blinks.
(When the AC adaptor is being used, a display
13 Zoom position display
(
Zoom positions are indicated in a range from Z00
(maximum wide angle) to Z99 (maximum zoom).
other than
may appear: this is not a sign of
14 Focus position display
malfunctioning.)
Indicates the focus position in the range of 00 to 99.
In addition to a numerical value (cal), AF appears in the
auto focus mode, and MF in the manual focus mode.
MF95 appears when focus is infinity (∞).
Batteries that indicate battery level in % (percent)
Such batteries indicate remaining battery level as
follows.
• B%: 10 %~99 %
The higher the number, the greater the focal distance.
Indicates the remaining battery level in %.
• MAX:
• EMP:
Indicates that the battery is fully charged.
Indicates that the remaining battery level
is less than 10 %.
ꢂꢅ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Batteries that do not indicate capacity in % (percent)
Such batteries indicate the battery level in voltages.
• 13.5 V: Indication of current battery voltage.
Center Information Display
The following information displays are provided.
24 Media remaining memory display
Indicates a remaining 3D recording time based on the
remaining time on the P2 cards inserted in card slots L
and R.
P2 card recording and playback data
indications
•ꢁBOS
• Indicates remaining time in 1-minute increments
from 0 to 999 minutes. 999 minutes and longer time
periods are also indicated as 999 minutes.
• The display blinks when 2 minutes or less time is left.
• The display does not appear while calculating the
remaining time.
Beginning of stream. No more data is available in the
rearward playback direction.
•ꢁCANNOTꢁPLAY
Appears when playback is disabled.
•ꢁCARDꢁERRꢁ(L)ꢁ(R)ꢁ(L/R):
This indicates trouble with the P2 card(s)
inserted in the card slot(s) shown has (have).
trouble.
25 Media information display
Indicates the slots that contain P2 cards and general
information on the media.
•ꢁUPDATING:ꢁReading card data
•ꢁCANNOTꢁREC
Appears when recording cannot be started by pressing
the REC button.
•ꢁEOS
End of stream. No more data is available in the forward
playback direction.
•ꢁSHOTꢁMARKꢁONꢁ(OFF)ꢁ(INVALID)
SHOT MARK appears when the user button or the lens
RET button to which it has been assigned is pressed.
L R
L R
L R
•
•
•
light green:
P2 card ready for recording
light green in reverse:
P2 card selected for recording
flash rapidly in white:
The card is being recognized
No card inserted
Write-protected
Full
Cannot recognize
P2 card in an invalid format (formatting will
take care of this problem)
-
•
•
•
•
•
:
:
:
:
:
P
F
X
E
•ꢁSYNCꢁPOSIꢁFAILED
Appears when the synchronization of the clip position
has failed.
26 Operation status display
Errors and warnings
• REC:
Recording
Errors and warnings appear when something goes wrong
with the camera or a P2 card malfunctions. If the problem
cannot be solved by turning off the camera and turning it
back on, try replacing the card and if that does not help, it
may be necessary to consult your supplier.
•ꢁDIRꢁENTRYꢁNGꢁCARDꢁLꢁ(R)ꢁ(L/R)
This message indicates that the directory on the card
has become corrupted and that normal recording
cannot be guaranteed if operation continues. Make a
quick backup of card data and reformat the card.
•ꢁFANꢁSTOPPED
• PAUSE:
Recording standby
Playback pause
Play
• h :
• q :
• y (t ) :
Fast-forward/fast-forward playback (fast-
reverse/fast-reverse playback)
• 4X y (4X t ) :
4x speed search (4x speed reverse search)
• CLIP hq (CLIP wh ) :
Clip forward (clip reverse), cue up of single
clips
FAN (1, 1/2, 1/3, 2, 2/3, 3, 1/2/3)
This indicates an error with the fan. The fan is under
suspension.
During DISPLAY OFF, only the REC and special
recording displays are shown at the top right.
Specialꢁrecordingꢁdisplay
The indication “I-“ appears when the interval recording
is set to ON.
•ꢁFORMATꢁERRꢁ!
This indicates a P2 card that does not meet the P2 card
standard
•ꢁHIGHꢁTEMPERATURE
A high-temperature error is detected.
•ꢁINCOMPATIBLEꢁCARD
This message indicates that the inserted card does not
meet required standards and cannot be used.
•ꢁLOWꢁBATTERY
This message indicates that the battery is depleted.
ꢃ0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
•ꢁRECꢁWARNING
•ꢁVERSIONꢁMISMATCHꢁ
This is displayed during a recording error. Do the
recording over. If this does not solve the problem,
consult your supplier.
ꢁꢁPLEASEꢁUPDATEꢁ
This message is displayed if a version mismatch has
occurred.
• CARDꢁERRꢁLꢁ(R)ꢁ(L/R):
Perform card updating.
This indicates trouble with the P2 card(s)
inserted into the card slot(s).
• Turn the power off if the warning continues.
• If the warning persists after rerecording, replace
the card with another card.
•ꢁWIRELESSꢁRF
This message indicates that reception from the wireless
receiver is poor.
Camera status display
•ꢁABB
• IRREGULARꢁFRMꢁSIG:
ABB indicator
•ꢁAUTOꢁKNEEꢁ(ON/OFF)
The reference signal, such as the GENLOCK
input, is distorted.
• L/RꢁDURATIONꢁNG:
Displayed when changing the AUTO KNEE switch
position.
•ꢁAWB
The duration of the recorded clip is different
between the L and R P2 cards.
• OVERꢁMAX#ꢁCLIPS: The limit for the number of clips
that can be recorded to one P2 card has
been reached.
• PULLꢁDOWNꢁERROR: Video pull-down sequence
error in a mode such as 24P (25P)
AWB indicator
•ꢁAWBꢁP3.ꢀK/AWBꢁP5.ꢂK
Displays the color temperature assigned to PRST when
the WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST. Also displayed
when AWB is performed in the PRST position.
•ꢁGAINꢁdB
Displayed when GAIN is switched.
•ꢁSHUTTERꢁꢁ(OFF)
Displayed when the shutter speed is changed.
•
RECꢁRAMꢁOVERFLOW: Overflow of recording memory
• ERROR Other causes
:
•ꢁRUNꢁDOWNꢁCARDꢁLꢁ(R)ꢁ(L/R)
This message indicates that a P2 card has been
overwritten the maximum number of times and that
normal recording cannot be guaranteed if operation
continues.
3D status display
•ꢁ3DꢁASSIST
It is best to replace such P2 cards with a new card.
•ꢁSYSTEMꢁERROR
• ALERT(ON/OFF): Status indication of the 3D ASSIST
ALERT function
This message indicates that a system error has
occurred. This type of error can often be corrected by
turning off the power and turning it back on again.
• CAMꢁMICONꢁERROR: The microprocessor in the
camera is not responding.
• PꢀꢁCONTROLꢁERROR: A P2 control error has
occurred.
• PꢀꢁMICONꢁERROR: The P2 microprocessor does not
respond
• CONV.(ON/OFF): Status indication of the 3D ASSIST
CONV. function
•ꢁ3DꢁASSISTꢁACTIVE
Displayed when the ZEBRA button is pressed while the
3D assist function is active.
•ꢁ3DꢁMODE
• NEAR: Displayed when the 3D MODE selector switch
position is changed to NEAR
• NORMAL: Displayed when the 3D MODE selector
switch position is changed to NORMAL.
• EXTRAꢁZOOM: Displayed when the 3D MODE
selector switch position is changed to EXTRA.
• PꢀꢁMICONꢁLINKꢁERROR: A connection error between
P2 microprocessors has occurred.
•ꢁTHUMBNAILꢁOPEN
This message is displayed in the viewfinder during
thumbnail operations.
•ꢁTURNꢁPOWERꢁOFF
This message indicates that an abnormal event has
occurred, for example, that a card was removed during
access or that a system mode change was made.
Turn the power off and then turn it back on again.
•ꢁWARNING
These messages are displayed when an error related to
the camera block is detected.
• FOCUSꢁNGꢁL(R)(L/R): Focus error
• ZOOMꢁNGꢁL(R)(L/R): Zoom error
• IRISꢁNGꢁL(R)(L/R): Iris error
• NDꢁFILTERꢁNGꢁL(R)(L/R): ND filter error
• CONV.ꢁNGꢁL(R)(L/R): Convergence error
• SUBꢁLENSꢁNGꢁL(R)(L/R): Sub-lens error
ꢃ1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking and Displaying Shooting Status
• Hold down the DISP/MODE CHK button in recording
standby or during recording to display the settings of
each shooting function, the list of functions assigned
to USER buttons and all other information. Release the
button to return to the regular screen.
• Press the DISP/MODE CHK button during recording
standby or recording clears all displays. Press again to
return to the regular display.
• These settings are maintained when the unit is turned off
and also when switching media and operating mode.
• The following items can be displayed on the LCD monitor
and in the viewfinder by pressing the DISP/MODE
CHK button or by configuring the menu option OTHER
DISPLAY in the DISPLAY SETUP screen.
DISP/MODEꢁCHKꢁbutton
Displays opened or hidden by settings
in the OTHER DISPLAY option
: Not affected
Displays that
MODE CHECK
Other menus that clear
displays
Displays that DISPLAY
No
Displays
–
OFF clears:
brings up:
–: Not affected
ON
–
OFF
–
1
2
Time code
Warnings
Is not cleared
Is not cleared
COUNTER Button
1
*
1
CARD/BATT
*
–
–
Displayed when REC MODE
is 2D LL mode
3
2D LL
Opened
Cleared
Recording format and system
frequency indication
Information
FOCUS BAR
Y GET brightness
4
Opened
Cleared
–
5
6
7
8
9
Is not displayed
Is not displayed
Is not cleared
Is not cleared
Is not cleared
–
–
–
–
–
2
*
FOCUS BAR
–
Opened
–
–
–
–
Recording/playback frame rate
Audio level meter
Cleared
–
–
LEVEL METER
CONVERGENCE
10 Convergence position
–
Opened
11 Shutter speed
(Displayed only with
Cleared
–
SHUTTER ON)
12 Iris
Opened
Cleared
–
13 Zoom position
14 Focus position
15 Calendar
–
–
–
–
–
–
ZOOM&FOCUS
ZOOM&FOCUS
DATE/TIME
Displayed only when there is
a recommended position
16 Recommended ND filter
Opened
Cleared
17 ND filter
18 Gain
19 WHITE BAL switch position
Opened
Opened
Opened
Cleared
Cleared
Cleared
–
–
–
Displayed only after AWB
adjustment
20 C TEMP (color temperature)
Is not cleared
–
–
21 LCD/EVF mode
22 Scene file name
Opened
Opened
Cleared
Cleared
–
–
23 Remaining battery charge
Goes on when battery
charge drops
–
–
CARD/BATT
24 Media remaining memory
25 Media information
Goes on when battery
charge drops
–
–
–
CARD/BATT
CARD/BATT
–
Cleared
(Appears at top
right only during
recording and in
special recording
modes)
Appears at top right only
during recording and in
special recording modes
26 Operation status
Opened
–
1 Only the warning that a P2 card has not been inserted is not displayed.
2 This is displayed at the lower left of the screen in DISPLAY OFF mode.
*
*
ꢃꢀ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MODE CHECK Indication
MODE CHECK provides an almost complete set of camera information.
Items 1 to 4 below are provided only by MODE CHECK.
4
T C 1 2 : 3 4 : 5 6 : 2 3
L R
9 9 9 min 1 3 . 5 V
P 2
F U L L
P AUS E D I ONC 1 6 0 SCENE 6
R
I MAGE
2 D L L
1 0 8 0 i
S L OT L : NOT SUP POR T ED
S L OT R : F U L L
MA I N : PUSH A F
1
2
100
AVC-I
A B BNG
AWBNG
P 3.2K
3
60
1
2
: SHOT MARK
: Y GE T
1 2
dB
FOCUS BAR
RE T : REC CHECK
1 0 9% ND 1
ND 1
NOV 1 6 2 0 1 1 1 2 : 3 4 : 5 6
6 0 : 2 4 PN
C
0 0
MF 9 9
Z 9 9
CH 1
CH 2
= = = = = = = =
1/1 2 3 . 4
C L OS E
1
P2 card slot status display
Displays status for P2 card slots L and R.
• ACTIVE:
Indicates cards that are ready for write
operation (includes cards selected for
recording)
• ACCESSING:
Indicates a card that is currently read or
being written to
• INFO READING:
Card in the recognition phase
• FULL: No more space available on the P2 card, or
the number of clips recorded on the P2 card
reached the limit.
• PROTECTED:
The P2 card is write-protected.
• NOT SUPPORTED:
The P2 card cannot be used or recognized.
• FORMAT ERROR:
The P2 card is not properly formatted.
• NO CARD:
No card has been inserted.
2
Information on user button and lens RET button
assignment
Information to check what functions are assigned to
user buttons and the lens RET button are provided in
the following sections.
For details, refer to [Assigning Functions to USER
Buttons] (page 50).
For details, refer to [RET] (page 113).
3
4
AWB, ABB error display
A mode check indicates when AWB and ABB fail to
operate normally.
Battery type
This indicates the battery type selected for detection of
remaining battery charge.
ꢃ3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Center Marker Display
A center marker is displayed when the menu option
Zebra Pattern Display
The AG-3DP1 can display two zebra patterns.
The zebra pattern set in the menu appears on the LCD
monitor and in the viewfinder when the ZEBRA button is
pressed or if the ZEBRA switch on the viewfinder is set to
ON.
MARKER in the DISPLAY SETUP screen is set to ON.
NOTE
The center marker display appears only on the LCD monitor
and in the viewfinder. It is not superimposed on signals output
via the HD SDI MONITOR OUT and HDMI connectors.
ZEBRAꢁbutton
Safety Zone Markers
A safety zone marker is displayed when the menu option
SAFETY ZONE is selected in the DISPLAY SETUP screen.
• OFF: Not displayed
• 90%: indicates the display area on a normal household
TV
Use the DISPLAY SETUP screen to set the level of zebra
pattern display.
Item
Setting
Description
Sets the level of the
right-leaning zebra
pattern 1.
ZEBRA1
DETECT
50%…70%…109%
Sets the level of the
left-leaning zebra
pattern 2.
Selects the ZEBRA2
type.
ZEBRA2
DETECT
50%…85%…109%
ON, SPOT, OFF
• 13:9: Indicates the display area available at a 13:9 aspect
ratio.
ZEBRA2
Underlined values indicate factory defaults.
SPOT: A video level between ZEBRA1 and ZEBRA2
displays a zebra pattern.
ZEBRA 2
• 14:9: Indicates the display area available at a 14:9 aspect
ratio.
Imageꢁlevel
ON
OFF
SPOT
109%
NOTE
ZEBRA 2
DETECT
Safety zone markers appear only on the LCD monitor and in
the viewfinder.They are not superimposed on signals output
via the HD SDI MONITOR OUT and HDMI connectors.
ZEBRA 1
DETECT
0%
NOTE
The zebra pattern cannot be displayed when the 3D assist
function is operating.
ꢃ4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Focus Assist Function
The AG-3DP1 is equipped with a focus assist function to
facilitate focusing using the expanded display on the LCD
monitor and the focus bar display on the LCD monitor/
viewfinder screen.
Waveform Monitor Function
Press the WFM button to display a waveform for an image
on the LCD monitor. Another press of the WFM button
changes the waveform to the vector display, and one more
press returns it to the normal display.
WFMꢁbutton
Expanded display (EXPANDED)
Pressing the FOCUS ASSIST button magnifies the image
at the center of the LCD monitor to facilitate focusing. The
image is magnified nearly 2x when SYSTEM MODE is
1080i, or nearly 1.5x when SYSTEM MODDE is 720P.
• The expanded display function is enabled only when
LCD/EVF mode is set to left-lens (L) image.
• The status indication and the zebra pattern disappear
and LCD EXPANDED appears at the top of the screen
during magnification.
• The waveform display does not appear in the viewfinder.
• The waveform display does not appear when the focus
assist (EXPANDED) function is used.
• The waveform display cannot be recorded.
FOCUSꢁASSISTꢁbutton
NOTE
This function magnifies only the image on the LCD monitor.
It does not magnify the image in the viewfinder or the image
of signals output via the HD SDI MONITOR OUT and HDMI
connectors.
Focus bar display (FOCUS BAR)
Set the menu option FOCUS BAR to ON in the DISPLAY
SETUP screen to display the focus bar. The length of the
focus bar indicates whether the image is in focus.
Outꢁofꢁfocus
Theꢁbarꢁextendsꢁtoꢁtheꢁ
rightꢁwhenꢁtheꢁimageꢁisꢁ
inꢁfocus.
NOTE
The focus bar is displayed only on the LCD monitor and in the
viewfinder. It is not displayed for the signals output via the HD
SDI MONITOR OUT and HDMI connectors.
ꢃ5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting and Setting the LCD Monitor/Viewfinder
ꢁ
4
UseꢁtheꢁsubscreenꢁinꢁtheꢁmenuꢁoptionꢁLCDꢁ
Using the LCD monitor
SETTINGꢁinꢁtheꢁDISPLAYꢁSETUPꢁscreenꢁ
toꢁadjustꢁscreenꢁcolorꢁlevel,ꢁbrightnessꢁandꢁ
contrast.
ꢁ
ꢁ
TurnꢁonꢁtheꢁPOWERꢁswitchꢁofꢁtheꢁAG-3DP1.
1
For details on menu operation, refer to [Using the
Menus] (page 106).
• At LCD SETTING of the DISPLAY SETUP screen,
select CHANGE.
SlideꢁtheꢁOPENꢁbuttonꢁinꢁtheꢁarrowꢁAꢁdirectionꢁ
2
toꢁopenꢁtheꢁLCDꢁmonitor.
DISPLAY SETUP
EVF PEAK LEVEL
EVF PEAK FREQ
LCD SETTING
LCD BACKLIGHT
ZWBRA1 DETECT
ZWBRA2 DETECT
ZWBRA2
0
LOW
RETURN
CHANGE
70%
85%
SPOT
ON
MARKER
①
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
ꢁ
5
UseꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁselectꢁanꢁitem.
LCD SETTING
NOTE
The LCD monitor opens to an angle of 90 degrees.
Attempts to open it further will damage the monitor.
LCD COLOR LEVEL
[ ]
[+]
[+]
[+]
LCD BRIGHTNESS
[ ]
ꢁ
3
AdjustꢁtheꢁangleꢁofꢁtheꢁLCDꢁmonitorꢁforꢁmostꢁ
convenientꢁviewing.
LCD CONTRAST
[ ]
• The monitor can turn up to 180 degrees towards
the lens and up to 90 degrees towards you.
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
NOTE
To prevent camera-recorder failure, do not use force
when adjusting the monitor (when open).
ꢁ
6
PressꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbutton,ꢁandꢁturnꢁtheꢁJOGꢁ
dialꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁadjustꢁtheꢁselectedꢁitem.
LCD SETTING
LCD COLOR LEVEL
[ ]
[+]
[+]
[+]
LCD BRIGHTNESS
[ ]
LCD CONTRAST
[ ]
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
ꢃꢂ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTE
Diopter Adjustment
• Pressing the RESET button when a value that can be
adjusted is selected in the setting menu LCD SETTING will
return the setting to its factory default.
• When closing the LCD monitor make sure that it is shut tight.
• In an environment with sudden temperature changes,
condensation may form on the liquid crystal surface of the
monitor. If this happens, wipe off the moisture with a soft, dry
cloth.
ꢁ
ꢁ
SetꢁtheꢁPOWERꢁswitchꢁofꢁtheꢁcameraꢁtoꢁON.
1
• Look at the image in the viewfinder.
Turnꢁtheꢁdiopterꢁadjustingꢁringꢁuntilꢁyouꢁgetꢁtheꢁ
sharpestꢁpossibleꢁimageꢁinꢁtheꢁviewfinder.
2
• When a cloth is used to wipe dew or dirt off the LCD monitor,
discoloration may appear on the screen.This is not a
malfunction.The discoloration disappears in a few minutes.
• When the camera-recorder is very cold, the video image
in the LCD monitor will appear slightly darker immediately
after the power is turned on. Once the interior of the camera-
recorder warms up, the LCD monitor delivers normal
brightness.
Diopterꢁadjustingꢁring
• The image on the LCD monitor may remain if the battery or
the power plug of an external DC power supply is removed
when the camera is on.This is normal and not a malfunction.
This image will disappear if the camera is left idle.
• Image lag may increase at low temperatures, but this is not a
malfunction.
Adjusting Left and Right Viewfinder
Positions
Emphasizing Image Outlines
Emphasizing outlines of images in the viewfinder and on
the LCD monitor makes it easier to focus.
This function does not affect video output from the camera
or video recorded by the camera.
ꢁ
ꢁ
Loosenꢁtheꢁviewfinderꢁleft-rightꢁpositioningꢁring.
1
Slideꢁtheꢁviewfinderꢁleftꢁandꢁrightꢁtoꢁfindꢁaꢁ
positionꢁthatꢁfacilitatesꢁviewing.
2
ꢁ
1
AdjustꢁEVFꢁPEAKꢁLEVELꢁandꢁEVFꢁPEAKꢁ
FREQꢁinꢁtheꢁDISPLAYꢁSETUPꢁscreen.
DISPLAY SETUP
EVF PEAK LEVEL
EVF PEAK FREQ
LCD SETTING
LCD BACKLIGHT
ZEBRA1 DETECT
ZEBRA2 DETECT
ZEBRA2
0
LOW
>>>
NORMAL
100%
85%
SPOT
ON
MARKER
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
Viewfinderꢁleft-rightꢁpositioningꢁring
ꢁ
3
Tightenꢁtheꢁviewfinderꢁleft-rightꢁpositioningꢁring.
ꢃꢃ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Handling Setup Data
Configuration of Setup Data Files
This camera makes it possible to save up to six scene files (1 to 6) in internal memory.
Use of an SD memory card makes it possible to save four sets of scene files (1 to 6) on an SD card for later retrieval.
The setting menu values can be stored as a user file in the camera and up to four files can be stored on the SD memory
card.
The setting data files are configured as shown below.
AG-3DP1
SD CARD
SCENE FILE
(Factory defaults)
SCENE FILE
(Current operating status values)
SCENE FILE
(Saved camera values)
SCENE FILE
(SD CARD)
SCENE FILE 1
Default value
SCENE FILE 1
Saved value
SCENE FILE 2
Saved value
SCENE FILE 3
Saved value
SCENE FILE 4
Saved value
SCENE FILE 5
Saved value
SCENE FILE 6
Saved value
SCENE FILE 1
SCENE FILE 1
SCENE FILE
screen INTIAL
Current value
SCENE FILE 2
Current value
SCENE FILE 3
Current value
SCENE FILE 4
Current value
SCENE FILE 5
Current value
SCENE FILE 6
Current value
SCENE FILE screen
SCENE FILE 2
SCENE FILE 3
SCENE FILE 4
SCENE FILE 5
SCENE FILE 6
SCENE FILE 1
SCENE FILE 2
SCENE FILE 3
SCENE FILE 4
SCENE FILE 5
SCENE FILE 6
SCENE FILE 1
SCENE FILE 2
SCENE FILE 3
SCENE FILE 4
SCENE FILE 5
SCENE FILE 6
SCENE FILE 1
SCENE FILE 2
SCENE FILE 3
SCENE FILE 4
SCENE FILE 5
SCENE FILE 6
1
*
1
LOAD/SAVE
*
SCENE FILE 2
Default value
SCENE FILE 3
Default value
SCENE FILE 4
Default value
SCENE FILE 5
Default value
SCENE FILE 6
Default value
FILE 1
FILE 2
FILE 3
FILE 4
1: scene files 1 to 6 individually
2: all scene files 1 to 6 at a time
CARD FUNCTIONS screen
*
*
2
SCENE FILE � LOAD/SAVE
*
USER FILE
(Factory defaults)
USER FILE
(Current operating status values)
USER FILE
(Saved camera values)
USER FILE
(SD CARD)
USER FILE initial value
USER FILE1
Current USER FILE values
Saved USER FILE values
OTHER FUNCTIONS screen
USER FILE � INTIAL
OTHER FUNCTIONS screen
USER FILE � LOAD/SAVE
USER FILE2
USER FILE3
USER FILE4
CARD FUNCTIONS screen
USER FILE LOAD/SAVE
�
NOTE
Running the menu option MENU INIT in the OTHER FUNCTIONS screen returns all current operating status values and saved
camera values in the 1 to 6 scene files as well as in the user file to their factory defaults.This function does not return the TIME
ZONE setting to its factory default.
ꢃꢄ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Data Using an SD memory card
Formatting, Writing and Reading
an SD Memory Card
Open the CARD FUNCTIONS screen from the setting
menu to format SD memory cards, write setting data to SD
memory cards and to read data stored on an SD memory
card.
By saving up to four files of setup menu settings on an
SD or SDHC memory card (optional accessory), you can
create a setup card that will allow you to quickly configure
camera settings before recording.
Handling SD Memory Cards
An SD memory card may be inserted or removed, either
CARD FUNCTIONS
SCENE FILE
RETURN
CHANGE
>>>
before or after the power is turned on.
USER FILE
SD CARD FORMAT
To insert an SD memory card
Open the slot cover, insert the SD memory card (optional
accessory) in the slot with the label side of the card facing
upwards and close the slot cover.
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
Use of SD memory cards in a non-SD/SDHC format
formatted on a device other than this camera will display
a FORMAT ERROR message at the top right of the screen.
Reformat such SD cards in the camera before use.
See [To format an SD memory card] (this page).
To format an SD Memory Card
NOTE
SD memory cards may be formatted via the thumbnail screen.
For more information, see [Formatting SD Memory Cards]
(page 100).
NOTE
• An SD memory card must be inserted with the right side
facing the slot. If the card cannot be inserted, it may the
wrong side up or back-to-front. Do not force it into the slot.
Check the card before reinserting it.
ꢁ
SelectꢁSDꢁCARDꢁFORMATꢁitemꢁinꢁCARDꢁ
FUNCTIONS,ꢁthenꢁpressꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbutton.
1
2
• Use only SD memory cards that conform to the SD standard
or the SDHC standard in this camera.
For details on menu operation, refer to [Using the
Menus] (page 106).
Be sure to read [SD memory card precautions] (page 22)
regarding SD memory handling.
ꢁ
SelectꢁEXCUTE,ꢁthenꢁpressꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁ
button.
To remove the SD memory card
CARD FUNCTIONS
Open the slot cover and make sure that the BUSY lamp is
not on before pushing the SD memory card further into the
slot and releasing it. This will cause the SD memory card to
pop out of the slot. Remove the SD memory card and close
the slot cover.
SCENE FINE
>>>
>>>
RETURN
EXECUTE
USER FILE
SD CARD FORMAT
SD memory cards must not be used or stored
in an environment where they may be
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
• Exposed to high temperatures/humidities;
• Exposed to water droplets; or
• Electrically charged.
For storage, the SD memory card must be kept inserted
into the camera with the lid closed.
ꢃꢅ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ꢁ
3
SelectꢁYESꢁinꢁtheꢁconfirmationꢁscreenꢁandꢁ
pressꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbutton.
How to Use Scene File Data
The camera stores up to six settings for specific shooting
situations as scene files.
When shooting, you can retrieve the desired file instantly.
• “SD CARD FORMAT OK” appears and the SD
memory card is formatted.
NOTE
Selecting a scene file
Check that no important data remains on a card before
formatting since data erased by formatting cannot be
recovered.
ꢁ
1
SelectꢁtheꢁmenuꢁoptionꢁFILEꢁSELECTꢁinꢁtheꢁ
SCENEꢁFILEꢁscreenꢁthenꢁpressꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁ
button.
The card will not be formatted if the following message
appears when the JOG dial button is pressed:
Error message
Remedy
For details on menu operation, refer to [Using the
Menus] (page 106).
SD CARD FORMAT NG
NO CARD
(No SD memory card
inserted.)
Insert an SD memory card.
SCENE FILE
1
FILE SELECT
SD CARD FORMAT NG
ERROR
LOAD/SAVE/INIT
(SYNCHRO SCAN)
DETAIL LEVEL
>>>
1/60.0
The card may be defective.
0
0
0
0
0
(SD memory card cannot be Replace the card.
formatted.)
V DETAIL LEVEL
DETAIL CORING
CHROMA LEVEL
CHROMA PHASE
SD CARD FORMAT NG
WRITE PROTECT
(SD memory card is write-
protected.)
Remove the card and
cancel the protect.
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
SD CARD FORMAT NG
CANNOT ACCESS
(SD memory card not
accessible).
The SD memory card is
not accessible. When the
current access operation
ends, reformat the card.
ꢁ
2
TurnꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁselectꢁtheꢁfileꢁ
number.
SCENE FILE
>
1
FILE SELECT
LOAD/SAVE/INIT
(SYNCHRO SCAN)
DETAIL LEVEL
2
3
4
5
6
0
0
V DETAIL LEVEL
DETAIL CORING
CHROMA LEVEL
CHROMA PHASE
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
NOTE
Changes to scene files do not affect SYSTEM MODE settings.
Use the SYSTEM SETUP screen to make such changes.
ꢄ0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing scene file settings
ꢁ
4
Whenꢁtheꢁscreenꢁshownꢁbelowꢁappears,ꢁuseꢁ
theꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁenterꢁaꢁꢂ-characterꢁfileꢁ
name.
Example 1: Change the name of the scene
file.
• Turning the JOG dial button changes the character
display in the following order: space ()
alphabet (A to Z) numerics (0 to 9)
symbols (; : < = > ? @ [ \ ] ^_-./).
• If the RESET button is pressed when the filename
has been set, the characters are cleared.
ꢁ
ꢁ
Selectꢁtheꢁsceneꢁfileꢁtoꢁbeꢁchanged.
1
SelectꢁtheꢁmenuꢁoptionꢁNAMEꢁEDITꢁinꢁtheꢁ
SCENEꢁFILEꢁscreen,ꢁthenꢁpressꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁ
button.
2
NAME EDIT
FILE SELECT 3
S P A R K
For details on menu operation, refer to [Using the
Menus] (page 106).
SCENE FILE
MATRIX
NAME EDIT
NORM1
RETURN
CHANGE
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
• After you finish setting the filename, press the
MENU button. This completes the NAME EDIT
change. A change that has been confirmed is
retained after a power down and is not affected by
dial position. Items set for the scene file are also
retained.
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
ꢁ
3
SelectꢁCHANGEꢁandꢁpressꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbutton.
Example 2 : Save the FILE 1 scene data to
SCENE FILE
the camera.
MATRIX
NAME EDIT
NORM1
RETURN
CHANGE
ꢁ
1
SelectꢁtheꢁmenuꢁoptionꢁLOAD/SAVE/INITꢁinꢁtheꢁ
SCENEꢁFILEꢁscreen,ꢁthenꢁpressꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁ
button.
For details on menu operation, refer to [Using the
Menus] (page 106).
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
SCENE FILE
1
RETURN
LOAD
SAVE
INITIAL
0
FILE SELECT
LOAD SAVE INIT
(SYNCHRO SCAN)
DETAIL LEVEL
V DETAIL LEVEL
DETAIL CORING
CHROMA LEVEL
CHROMA PHASE
0
0
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
ꢄ1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ꢁ
2
SelectꢁSAVEꢁandꢁpressꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbutton.
Saving Scene Files and Other
Settings on SD Memory Cards
You can save up to four scene file settings or other settings
as files on an SD memory card, and you can also load
them from the card.
• Current scene file settings are automatically saved in the
camera and written to an SD memory card. When data
has been read from an SD memory card, the current
settings are rewritten at the same time as the data saved
inside the unit.
SCENE FILE
1
FILE SELECT
LOAD SAVE INIT
(SYNCHRO SCAN)
DETAIL LEVEL
RETURN
LOAD
SAVE
V DETAIL LEVEL
DETAIL CORING
CHROMA LEVEL
CHROMA PHASE
INITIAL
0
0
0
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
• The data in all the scene files 1 to 6, is rewritten.
Be sure to read [Handling SD Memory Cards] (page 79)
regarding SD memory handling.
ꢁ
3
SelectꢁYESꢁandꢁpressꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbutton.
• To return to the menu level above, press the
MENU button.
The following procedure shows how to save scene files.
SCENE FILE
SAVE ?
ꢁ
Setꢁtheꢁunit’sꢁPOWERꢁswitchꢁtoꢁON.
1
2
YES
NO
PUSH SET
ꢁ
SelectꢁtheꢁmenuꢁoptionꢁSCENEꢁFILEꢁinꢁtheꢁ
CARDꢁFUNCTIONSꢁscreen,ꢁthenꢁpressꢁtheꢁ
JOGꢁdialꢁbutton.
For details on menu operation, refer to [Using the
Menus] (page 106).
• “PROCESSING” appears and the following
message is shown when all settings have been
completed.
ꢁ
3
SelectꢁCHANGEꢁandꢁpressꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbutton.
• Select the menu option USER FILE for other
settings.
CARD FUNCTIONS
SCENE FILE
RETURN
CHANGE
>>>
USER FILE
SAVE
SD CARD FORMAT
COMPLETED !
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
• After changing the scene file settings, to return to the
settings to the previously saved values, select LOAD in
step 2 and perform the operation described in step 3.
• To return the scene file settings to their factory defaults,
select INITIAL in step 2 and perform the operation
described in step 3.
• To save and read user file settings or return them to
their factory defaults, open the setting menu OTHER
FUNCTIONS screen and run USER FILE in the same way
as when handling scene files.
ꢁ
4
Selectꢁtheꢁfileꢁnumberꢁ(1ꢁtoꢁ4)ꢁusingꢁtheꢁJOGꢁ
dialꢁbutton.
• Press the JOG dial button again to confirm the
setting.
SCENE FILE(SD CARD)
FILE SELECT
READ
1
>>>
WRITE
>>>
FILE 1
NO FILE
NO FILE
NO FILE
NO FILE
>>>
FILE 2
FILE 3
FILE 4
TITLE RELOAD
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
ꢄꢀ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To title a file
ꢁ
5
SelectꢁWRITEꢁandꢁpressꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbutton,ꢁ
thenꢁselectꢁEXECUTEꢁandꢁpressꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁ
button.
ꢁ
Performꢁstepsꢁ1ꢁtoꢁ5.
1
2
SCENE FILE(SD CARD)
FILE SELECT
READ
1
ꢁ
UseꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁselectꢁcharacters,ꢁ
thenꢁpressꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁmoveꢁtoꢁtheꢁ
nextꢁcharacter.
>>>
WRITE
RETURN
EXECUTE
NO FILE
NO FILE
NO FILE
>>>
FILE 1
FILE 2
• You can input any of the following characters:
Space, A to Z, 0 to 9, : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ^_-./
• You can erase all characters using the RESET
button.
FILE 3
FILE 4
TITLE RELOAD
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
ꢁ
ꢁ
Whenꢁallꢁentriesꢁhaveꢁbeenꢁmade,ꢁmoveꢁtheꢁ
cursorꢁtoꢁtheꢁrightꢁofꢁtheꢁenteredꢁtitle.
3
ꢁ
6
TurnꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁmoveꢁtoꢁYESꢁandꢁ
pressꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbutton.
• In the following example, TITLE 1 is the filename.
• When writing is completed, WRITE OK appears.
SelectꢁYESꢁandꢁpressꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbutton.
SCENE FILE(SD CARD)
WRITE FILE 1
4
SCENE FILE(SD CARD)
WRITE FILE 1
YES
NO
PUSH SET
YES
NO
PUSH SET
TITLE EDIT
TITLE EDIT
T I T L E 1
T I T L E 1
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
• WRITE OK appears when the title is written.
To load a file
NOTE
Perform steps 1 to 4. Select READ in step 5, select
EXECUTE and press the JOG dial button. READ OK
appears when loading completes.
Like scene files, process user files by using the menu
option USER FILE in the CARD FUNCTION screen.
• If WRITE NG FORMAT ERROR appears, format the SD
memory card.
• If WRITE NG WRITE PROTECT appears, change the lock tab
position to enable writing.
• If WRITE NG CANNOT ACCESS appears, quit all other
operations (such as playback) before proceeding.
• If WRITE NG ERROR appears, the SD memory card may be
defective. Replace it.
Reloading Files From an SD Memory Card
Perform steps 1 to 3, move to TITLE RELOAD so that YES
is displayed in step 5, and press the JOG dial button.
The file is reloaded.
ꢄ3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Preparation
Power Supply
A battery or an external DC power supply can be used as
the power supply for the camera-recorder.
Insert the battery and slide it in the direction of
2
the arrow.
Release lever
Using a Battery
The following is a list of batteries that have been tested and
verified to work with the camera.
Anton/Bauer batteries
HYTRON140
DIONIC90, DIONIC160
IDX batteries
“ENDURA” E-10 / E-10S
PAG batteries
PAGL95
NOTE
• Although other batteries may be used by changing the menu
setting, it is recommended that you use batteries that have
been tested and verified to work with camera.
• Charge the battery with the battery charger before using it.
(Please refer to the battery charger’s instruction manual for
information about charging.)
NOTE
Removing the battery
Completely push down and hold the release lever
on the battery holder. Then, slide the battery in the
opposite direction to the arrow while holding the lever
down.
Mounting the Battery and Setting
the Battery Type
Set the battery type.
3
Using an Anton/Bauer Battery
• Select the battery type listed under BATTERY
SELECT. Select the menu option BATTERY
SELECT from the setting menu BATTERY SETUP
screen.
Mount an Anton/Bauer battery.
1
NOTE
If you wish to turn on a light using the Camera Studio
System (AG-BS300, AG-CA300G), attach the battery
plate to the AG-CA300G and mount the battery on it
for the supply power for the light via the battery plate.
If power is supplied via the Light connector of this
unit, the unit may not operate, because of overcurrent
protection of AG-BS300/AG-CA300G activated by
excess current generated when the light is turned on.
Anton/Bauer Battery
NOTE
The Anton/Bauer battery holder includes both a power
supply output connector for lighting and a lighting
control switch, which are convenient when attaching a
light. Please contact Anton/Bauer for information about
the lighting system.
84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When using a V-mount type battery
Use of the External DC Power
Supply
ꢁ
1
MountꢁtheꢁV-mountꢁadapterꢁplate.
Insert the plate and slide it as shown below.
• To remove the plate, slide the release lever
downwards.
ꢁ
1
ConnectꢁtheꢁexternalꢁDCꢁpowerꢁsupplyꢁtoꢁtheꢁ
DCꢁINꢁsocketꢁonꢁtheꢁunit.
DCꢁcable
DCꢁINꢁsocket
ExternalꢁDCꢁꢁ
powerꢁsupply
ꢁ
ꢁ
Turnꢁ“ON”ꢁtheꢁpowerꢁswitchꢁofꢁtheꢁexternalꢁDCꢁ
powerꢁsupply.ꢁ(Ifꢁtheꢁpowerꢁswitchꢁisꢁavailableꢁ
onꢁtheꢁexternalꢁDCꢁpowerꢁsupply)
2
Releaseꢁlever
Turnꢁtheꢁcamera-recorderꢁpowerꢁswitchꢁON.
3
ꢁ
2
Setꢁtheꢁbatteryꢁtype.
• Select the battery type listed under BATTERY
SELECT. Select the menu option BATTERY
SELECT from the setting menu BATTERY SETUP
screen.
• When using a battery not listed under BATTERY
SELECT, select TYPE A or TYPE B and set each
item according to the battery characteristics.
For details, refer to [BATTERY SETUP Screen]
(page 117).
NOTE
• For information about the V-mount adapter plate, please
contact the store where you purchased the camera-recorder.
• With the V-mount adapter plate installed, % (percent) values
cannot be displayed when using batteries that show the
remaining battery capacity.
ꢄ5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UseꢁofꢁexternalꢁDCꢁpowerꢁsupply
MakeꢁsureꢁthatꢁtheꢁoutputꢁvoltageꢁofꢁtheꢁexternalꢁDCꢁ
powerꢁsupplyꢁmeetsꢁtheꢁratedꢁvoltageꢁofꢁtheꢁcameraꢁbeforeꢁ
makingꢁaꢁconnection.
TheꢁoutputꢁcurrentꢁofꢁtheꢁexternalꢁDCꢁpowerꢁsupplyꢁshouldꢁ
beꢁlargeꢁenoughꢁtoꢁprovideꢁtheꢁconnectedꢁcameraꢁwithꢁitsꢁ
totalꢁamperageꢁneedsꢁwithꢁaꢁreasonableꢁmargin.
Useꢁtheꢁfollowingꢁformulaꢁtoꢁcalculateꢁtheꢁtotalꢁamperageꢁ
ofꢁtheꢁcamera.
totalꢁpowerꢁconsumptionꢁ÷ꢁvoltage
Whenꢁtheꢁpowerꢁisꢁturnedꢁon,ꢁaꢁrushꢁcurrentꢁoccurs.ꢁIfꢁtheꢁ
powerꢁsupplyꢁisꢁinsufficientꢁduringꢁthisꢁtime,ꢁtheꢁcameraꢁ
mayꢁbeꢁdamaged.ꢁTherefore,ꢁweꢁrecommendꢁusingꢁanꢁ
externalꢁDCꢁpowerꢁsupplyꢁthatꢁprovidesꢁatꢁleastꢁtwiceꢁtheꢁ
totalꢁpowerꢁconsumedꢁbyꢁtheꢁcameraꢁandꢁallꢁtheꢁdevicesꢁ
connectedꢁtoꢁtheꢁunitꢁthatꢁpowerꢁonꢁwhenꢁtheꢁcameraꢁ
powersꢁonꢁ(example:ꢁviewfinder).ꢁTheꢁDCꢁcableꢁshouldꢁbeꢁ
aꢁtwo-coreꢁ1ꢄꢁAWGꢁ(orꢁlarger)ꢁshieldedꢁcableꢁ(nominalꢁ
cross-sectionalꢁarea:ꢁ0.ꢄꢀ4ꢁmmꢀ).
Whenꢁusingꢁanꢁexternalꢁpowerꢁsupplyꢁotherꢁthanꢁtheꢁ
ACꢁadaptor,ꢁcheckꢁtheꢁDCꢁINꢁsocketꢁpinꢁinformationꢁ
toꢁensureꢁcorrectꢁpolarity.ꢁIfꢁaꢁ+1ꢀꢁVꢁpowerꢁsupplyꢁisꢁ
accidentallyꢁconnectedꢁtoꢁtheꢁGNDꢁterminal,ꢁthisꢁcouldꢁ
causeꢁaꢁfireꢁorꢁpersonalꢁinjury.
DCꢁINꢁsocket
PinꢁNo.
1
Signal
GND
4
1
2
3
ꢀ,ꢁ3
4
NC
+1ꢀꢁV
CASE
FrameꢁGND
NOTE
• When both the battery and the external DC power supply are
connected, power is supplied from the external DC power
supply.The battery can be removed or mounted while using
an external DC power supply.
• When using an external DC power supply, make sure you
turn on the external DC power supply before turning on the
camera-recorder’s power switch. If this sequence is reversed,
the camera-recorder may malfunction due to slow rising of
the external DC power supply voltage.
• The light circuit does not operate when power is supplied
via the DC IN socket.The light circuit can only operate when
power is supplied through the Anton/Bauer battery holder.
ꢄꢂ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preparing for Audio Input
Take the following steps to prepare the camera for
connecting audio input devices.
ꢁ
3
ConnectꢁtheꢁmicrophoneꢁcableꢁtoꢁtheꢁMICꢁINꢁ
jackꢁonꢁtheꢁcamera.
When Using the Front Microphone
The AG-MC900G stereo microphone kit (optional) can be
mounted on the microphone holder of the viewfinder.
ꢁ
1
Openꢁtheꢁmicrophoneꢁholder.
MICꢁINꢁjack
ꢁ
4
SetꢁtheꢁAUDIOꢁINꢁswitchꢁtoꢁFRONTꢁdependingꢁ
onꢁtheꢁaudioꢁchannelꢁtoꢁbeꢁrecorded.
Microphoneꢁholder
ꢁ
2
Mountꢁtheꢁmicrophoneꢁandꢁtightenꢁtheꢁclampingꢁ
screw.
Clampingꢁscrew
AUDIOꢁINꢁswitch
NOTE
When using the front microphone, you may replace the
microphone holder with the supplied one to reduce noise
during zooming.
ꢄꢃ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using a Wireless Receiver
When Using Audio Devices
When using the Unislot Wireless Receiver
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
ConnectꢁtheꢁaudioꢁdeviceꢁtoꢁtheꢁAUDIOꢁINꢁjackꢁ
withꢁtheꢁXLRꢁcable.
1
2
3
ꢁ
1
Removeꢁtheꢁlid,ꢁinstallꢁtheꢁwirelessꢁreceiverꢁandꢁ
screwꢁitꢁdown.ꢁ
SetꢁtheꢁAUDIOꢁINꢁswitchꢁtoꢁREARꢁforꢁtheꢁ
channelꢁtoꢁwhichꢁtheꢁXLRꢁcableꢁisꢁconnected.
SetꢁtheꢁLINE/MICꢁselectorꢁswitchꢁonꢁtheꢁrearꢁ
panelꢁtoꢁLINE.
LINE/MICꢁselectorꢁswitch
ꢁ
2
SetꢁtheꢁAUDIOꢁINꢁswitchꢁtoꢁW.L.ꢁforꢁtheꢁaudioꢁ
channelsꢁthatꢁwillꢁbeꢁrecorded.ꢁ
AUDIOꢁINꢁswitch
AUDIOꢁINꢁjack
AUDIOꢁINꢁSwitch
• Set the menu option WIRELESS TYPE in the
AUDIO SETUP screen to DUAL for a 2-channel
wireless receiver.
ꢄꢄ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Attaching/Adjusting Accessories
NOTE
Mounting the Camera on a Tripod
If the tripod adapter’s pin does not return to its original
position after the camera has been removed, hold the red lever
down and move the black lever in the direction of the arrow
again, in order to return the pin to its original position.
Please note that the camera cannot be mounted if the pin
remains in the center.
Use an optional (SHAN-TM700) tripod adapter to place the
camera on a tripod.
ꢁ
1
Attachꢁtheꢁtripodꢁadapterꢁtoꢁtheꢁtripod.
Tripodꢁadapter
Attaching the Shoulder Strap
Attach the shoulder strap to the shoulder strap bracket.
To detach the shoulder strap, first open the hooks, then
detach the strap.
ShoulderꢁStrap
Panꢁhead
NOTE
Use the holes in the tripod adapter that will make
it possible to position the camera over the tripod
adapter’s center of gravity.
Pressꢁtoꢁopenꢁ
theꢁhook.
Also, make sure that the diameter of the selected hole
matches the diameter of the pan head screw.
ꢁ
2
Attachꢁtheꢁcameraꢁtoꢁtheꢁtripodꢁadapter.
• Slide the camera forward along the grooves until
you hear a “click”.
NOTE
Makeꢁsureꢁthatꢁtheꢁshoulderꢁstrapꢁisꢁsecurelyꢁattached.
Adjusting the Grip Belt
The length of the grip belt can be adjusted.
Once detach the tape, adjust the grip position then fix it
with the tape again.
Removing the Camera from the Tripod
Adapter
While holding the red lever down, move the black lever in
the direction of the arrow, and slide the camera backward
to remove it.
NOTE
Beꢁsureꢁthatꢁtheꢁgripꢁbeltꢁisꢁsecured.
RedꢁLever
BlackꢁLever
ꢄꢅ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DC OUT Connector and External REC Start/Stop Switch Connection
The DC OUT connector on the camera can output a 1.5 A
current.
Connecting an external switch to this connector enables
REC Start and Stop control.
Pin assignment
1
2
GND
TALLY OUT
An LED can be connected and used as a tally lamp, which
is convenient when the camera is mounted on a crane
during recording.
The AG-3DP1 has open collector output.
TALLY ON:
Low impedance
TALLY OFF:
High impedance
3
4
REC Start/Stop switch
This pin is connected in parallel with the REC button.
+12 V
NOTE
Be sure to check polarity before connecting an external device
as incorrect connection could lead to damage.
DCꢁOUTꢁconnector
(Connection example)
Cableꢁconnector
HR10A-ꢃP-4P(ꢃ3)
4
3
1
2
HiroseꢁElectricꢁCo.
(For details on the
connector, refer to
page 138.)
LED
Resist-
ance
REC
Start/Stop
ꢅ0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails
A clip is a data group that includes the images and sounds created from one shooting session, together with additional
information such as meta data.
The following manipulations can be performed using the cursor and SET buttons, while checking the images displayed on
the LCD monitor:
• Playback, delete, or restore the clip.
• Add or delete a shot mark on the clip thumbnail.
• Format P2 cards and SD memory cards.
• Uploading and editing clip metadata from the SD memory card
• Saving the log data
Thumbnail Operations
Thumbnail Manipulations Overview
Thumbnail screens are configured as follows:
THUMBNAIL
OPERATION
PROPERTY
DELETE
FORMAT
REPAIRꢁCLIP
LOGꢁDATA
EXIT
CLIPꢁPROPERTY
ALLꢁCLIP
SAMEꢁFORMATꢁCLIPS
SELECTEDꢁCLIPS
MARKEDꢁCLIPS
SETUP
EXIT
INDICATOR
DATAꢁDISPLAY
DATEꢁFORMAT
THUMBNAILꢁSIZE
PLAYBACKꢁRESUME
THUMBNAILꢁINIT
EXIT
CARDꢁSTATUS
DEVICES
PROPERTYꢁSETUP
EXIT
METAꢁDATA
LOAD
RECORD
USERꢁCLIPꢁNAME
INITIALIZE
PROPERTY
EXIT
ꢅ1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UPDATING..:
Indicated when the unit is updating the
screen or reading data. When the screen is
being updated, the rotating icon is indicated.
For details, refer to [Switching the Thumbnail Display]
(page 94).
Thumbnail Screen
Press the THUMBNAIL button to display the thumbnail
screen on the LCD monitor. Pressing the THUMBNAIL
button again returns the display to the regular display.
When switching is done from the regular screen display to
the thumbnail screen display, all the clips will be displayed
on the thumbnail screen.
2
3
3D logo (or 2D LL logo)
Indicates whether the displayed thumbnails are those of
3D recording or of 2D LL recording.
Pressing the THUMBNAIL MENU button allows you to
navigate the thumbnail menu.
Slot information
The status of the card slots L (left) and R (right) is
indicated. The letter of the card slot that contains a P2
card is indicated in yellow.
NOTE
When the TCG switch is set to “SET” to set the time code and
user bits or when the camera menu is open, the THUMBNAIL
button does not work.
NOTE
When the following P2 card is inserted, the slot letter is
displayed in a magenta frame.
1
2
3
RUN DOWN CARD
4
5
(A P2 card on which the maximum number of
overwrites has been exceeded.)
DIR ENTRY NG CARD
6
7
(A P2 card on which the directory structure is not
supported.)
4
5
Remaining battery indicator
Indicates the remaining battery capacity.
Clip Number
The numbers set by the camera for all the clips
recognized correctly by the P2 card. These numbers
are allocated in chronological order, by shooting dates
and times.
8
9
10
11
If clips cannot be played because of different recording
formats, they are displayed in red.
12 13
6
7
Thumbnail scroll bar
Indicates the approximate location of the current
thumbnail among all thumbnails.
Time Display
You can set this to display the time code at the start
of clip recording, the user bits at the start of clip
recording, the shooting time, the shooting date, the
shooting date and time, clip name or USER CLIP
NAME.
14 15 16 17
1
Display Mode
Displays thumbnail types and other information
screens.
For details, refer to [Setting the Thumbnail Display
Mode] (page 101).
8
9
Recording mode
The recording mode for the clip on which the pointer is
located is indicated.
ALL:
Display all clips.
SAME FORMAT:
The clips in the same format as the system
format are shown. To check the format,
consult system mode and REC FORMAT
indicated on the STATUS screen of the LCD
monitor/viewfinder.
System mode
The format for the clip on which the pointer is located is
indicated.
10 Duration
The duration of the clip on which the pointer is located
For details, see [LCD Monitor/Viewfinder
Screen Status Displays] (page 67).
SELECT: The clips selected with the SET button are
shown.
is indicated.
11 3D clip/2D LL clip abnormal status indicator
Clip L is inserted into card slot R, or clip R is
inserted into card slot L. Insert the P2 cards
correctly.
MARKER:
Display clips with shot marks.
Clip L or R is not inserted. Insert a P2 card that
contains the missing clip.
ꢅꢀ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Clip L or R recorded in 2D LL mode is not
inserted. Insert a P2 card that contains the missing
clip.
Selecting Thumbnails
Multiple thumbnails can be randomly selected in the
thumbnail screen.
X
?
12
Defective Clip Indicator and
Unknown Clip indicator
This marker is displayed for defective clips, which may
result from a variety of causes, e.g., powering-down
during recording.
Clip with yellow defective clip indicators can be
restored in some cases. Please refer to [Restoring
Clips] (page 96) for more information.
A clip displayed with a red defective clip indicator
cannot be restored and must be deleted. If the clip
cannot be deleted, format the P2 card.
ꢁ
ꢁ
Useꢁtheꢁcursorꢁbuttonsꢁtoꢁmoveꢁtheꢁpointerꢁ
(yellowꢁframe)ꢁtoꢁtheꢁdesiredꢁclipꢁandꢁpressꢁtheꢁ
SETꢁbutton.ꢁ
1
• The frame around the selected thumbnail changes
to a blue frame. Press the SET button again to
deselect the clip.
Additionalꢁclipsꢁcanꢁbeꢁselectedꢁbyꢁrepeatingꢁ
stepꢁ1.
2
?
is displayed for clips such as those which differ in
format from the P2 standard.
!
13
14
Incomplete Clip Indicator
It is possible to display only the selected thumbnails in the
thumbnail screen for playback. Please refer to [Switching
the Thumbnail Display] (page 94) for more information.
Indicates that although a clip is recorded across
multiple P2 cards, one of these cards is not inserted
into a P2 card slot.
M
Shot Mark Indicator
This marker is displayed for a clip with a shot mark
attached. For details, refer to [Shot Marker (SHOT
MARK) Recording Function] (page 41).
NOTE
• To move the pointer to the first or last clip, hold down the
SHIFT button and press the up and down cursor (e/r)
buttons.
P
15
16
Indicator for clips with proxy
This marker is displayed for clips with proxy attached.
• To select a sequence of clips, select the first clip and move
the pointer to another clip.Then hold down the SHIFT button
and press the SET button.This will select all clips from the
clip selected first to the clip at the pointer and all clips in
between.
T
Text Memo Indicator
This marker is displayed for a clip with a text memo
attached.
• To cancel selected clips, hold down the SHIFT button while
pressing the EXIT button.
E
17
Edit Copied Clip Indicator
In models which support edit copying, such as the AJ-
HPM110, this marker is displayed on clips which have
undergone edit copying. For more information about
edit copying, see the instruction manual for a model
that supports edit copying.
a
b c d e f
a
b
c
d
LCD monitor
THUMBNAIL button
EXIT button
e q r w cursor buttons
g SET button
e
f
MENU (thumbnail menu) button
SHIFT button
ꢅ3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing back Clips
Switching the Thumbnail Display
The display can be switched so that only those clips
matching the specified conditions are displayed in the
thumbnail screen.
ꢁ
1
PressꢁtheꢁTHUMBNAILꢁbutton.
• The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD
monitor.
ꢁ
PressꢁtheꢁTHUMBNAILꢁbutton.
1
2
• The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD
monitor.
ꢁ
Useꢁtheꢁcursorꢁbuttonsꢁtoꢁmoveꢁtheꢁpointerꢁoverꢁ
theꢁdesiredꢁclip.
2
3
ꢁ
PressꢁtheꢁMENUꢁbutton.ꢁ
ꢁ
PressꢁtheꢁPLAY/PAUSEꢁbutton.
• The thumbnail menu opens.
• The clip at pointer position is played back on the
LCD monitor.
• After the clip at the cursor location has been
played, subsequent clips are played back in order.
When the last clip has been played, the thumbnail
screen appears.
NOTE
• When playing back clips, it is not necessary
to “select” the clips (blue frames around the
thumbnails).
• Clips with clip numbers displayed in red cannot be
played.
• During normal playback, or variable speed playback
(i.e. 4x speed playback) except during pause, the
left-lens (L) image is output from the left and right
channels.
a
b
• During playback, pressing the REW button starts 4X
speed reverse playback, and the FF button starts 4X
speed fast playback. Press the PLAY/PAUSE button to
return to normal playback.
a
b
THUMBNAIL button
MENU button
• During clip playback, pressing the PLAY/PAUSE button
will temporarily stop (pause) the process.
During a pause, pressing the REW button moves the
pause position to the beginning of the clip. Pressing
the REW button again moves the pause position to the
beginning of the previous clip.
During a pause, pressing the FF button moves the pause
position to the beginning of the next clip.
• Pressing the STOP button during clip playback stops the
playback and returns the display to the thumbnail screen.
NOTE
• When playback is stopped, the position of the pointer moves
to the clip that was being played back, regardless of where
playback started.
• When the PLAY/PAUSE button is pressed again, playback will
start from the beginning of the clip on which the pointer is
positioned.To begin playback from the last stop position, set
PLAYBACK RESUME to on. Refer to [Setting the Thumbnail
Display Mode] (page 101) for further details.
ꢅ4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ꢁ
3
SelectꢁTHUMBNAILꢁfromꢁtheꢁthumbnailꢁmenu.ꢁ
Shot Mark
A shot mark can be added to a clip thumbnail to
• Switch the thumbnail display by selecting one of
the following items:
distinguish this clip from other clips.
ꢁ
ꢁ
PressꢁtheꢁTHUMBNAILꢁbutton.
1
• The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD
monitor.
Useꢁtheꢁcursorꢁbuttonsꢁtoꢁmoveꢁtheꢁpointerꢁ
overꢁtheꢁclipꢁtoꢁwhichꢁyouꢁwantꢁtoꢁattachꢁaꢁshotꢁ
mark.
2
ꢁ
3
PressꢁtheꢁUSERꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁwhichꢁtheꢁshotꢁmarkꢁ
functionꢁhasꢁbeenꢁassigned.ꢁ
ALL CLIP:
Displays all the clips according to the
selected REC MODE.
3D mode: Clips recorded in 3D recording
mode
• This adds a shot mark to the thumbnail of the clip
at the pointer position. The shot mark is added in
the clip in card slot L only.
• To delete a shot mark, place the pointer on the
clip a second time and press the USER button to
which the shot mark function has been assigned.
2D LL mode: Clips recorded in 2D LL
recording mode.
SAME FORMAT CLIPS:
Displays clips of the current system
format.
SELECTED CLIPS:
Display randomly selected clips.
The thumbnails are displayed in the
specified order.
MARKED CLIPS:
Display clips with shot marks attached.
SETUP: Please refer to [Setting the Thumbnail
Display Mode] (page 101) for information
about this item.
EXIT:
Close the sub-menu.
USERꢁMAIN,ꢁUSER1ꢁandꢁUSERꢀꢁbuttons
NOTE
• A shot mark can be attached during recording.
• Adding shot marks after recording stops, attaches the shot
mark to the most recently recorded clip.
Please refer to [Shot Marker (SHOT MARK) Recording Function]
(page 41) for more information.
ꢅ5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Deleting Clips
Restoring Clips
Restores clips that are defective as a result of sudden
powering-down during recording, or removal of the P2 card
being accessed.
ꢁ
ꢁ
PressꢁtheꢁTHUMBNAILꢁbutton.
1
• The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD
monitor.
NOTE
Only those clips with yellow defective clip indicators can be
restored. Delete the clips with red defective clip indicators. If
the clip cannot be deleted, format the P2 card.
Useꢁtheꢁcursorꢁbuttonsꢁtoꢁmoveꢁtheꢁpointerꢁtoꢁ
theꢁclipꢁtoꢁbeꢁdeletedꢁandꢁpressꢁtheꢁSETꢁbuttonꢁ
toꢁselectꢁtheꢁclip.ꢁ
2
During restoration of the clips, however, the defective-clip
indicator may change from yellow to red, resulting in inability
to restore the clips.
ꢁ
PressꢁtheꢁMENUꢁbuttonꢁandꢁselectꢁ
OPERATIONꢁꢁDELETEꢁfromꢁtheꢁthumbnailꢁ
menu.
3
4
ꢁ
PressꢁtheꢁTHUMBNAILꢁbutton.
1
2
• The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD
monitor.
ꢁ
Useꢁtheꢁcursorꢁbuttonsꢁtoꢁmoveꢁtheꢁpointerꢁoverꢁ
theꢁclipꢁyouꢁwishꢁtoꢁrestoreꢁthenꢁpressꢁtheꢁSETꢁ
buttonꢁtoꢁselectꢁthatꢁclip.
ꢁ
Theꢁfollowingꢁscreenꢁappears.ꢁUseꢁtheꢁcursorꢁ
buttonsꢁandꢁtheꢁSETꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁselectꢁYES.
• Defective clips are indicated by defective clip
indicators.
ꢁ
3
PressꢁtheꢁMENUꢁbutton,ꢁandꢁselectꢁ
OPERATIONꢁꢁREPAIRꢁCLIPꢁfromꢁtheꢁ
thumbnailꢁmenu.
• When a confirmation screen asks you to confirm
that you want to repair the clip, use a cursor button
and the SET button to select YES if you want to
restore the clip.
• The clip is deleted. All selected clips (in blue
frames) are deleted by this operation.
NOTE
Toꢁinterruptꢁdeleting,ꢁpressꢁtheꢁSHIFTꢁandꢁEXITꢁbuttonsꢁorꢁ
theꢁSETꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁcancelꢁtheꢁoperation.ꢁ
Partiallyꢁdeletedꢁclipsꢁcannotꢁbeꢁrestoredꢁbyꢁcanceling.ꢁ
ꢅꢂ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Clip Meta Data items
Setting of Clip Meta Data
Clip Meta Data includes the following items: Underlined
items can be set by reading the metadata upload file on
the SD memory card. Other items are set automatically
during shooting. Using the latest update version of P2
Viewer, metadata upload files can be written to SD memory
cards using a PC. Download the latest update version of P2
Viewer from the support desk at the following website, and
install it on your PC.
Information such as the name of the person who shot the
video, the name of the reporter, or the shooting location,
can be read from the SD memory card, and can be
recorded as Clip Meta Data.
• The camera does not support recording of text memo
data
Reading the SD memory card that
contains the Clip Meta Data (metadata
upload file)
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/
Regarding SD memory cards to be used, see [SD memory
card precautions] (page 22).
NOTE
Files edited using software other than P2 Viewer are displayed
as “UNKNOWN DATA!”, and may not be read.
ꢁ
InsertꢁtheꢁSDꢁmemoryꢁcardꢁthatꢁcontainsꢁtheꢁ
ClipꢁMetaꢁDataꢁ(metadataꢁuploadꢁfile).
1
2
GLOBAL CLIP ID:
Displays the global clip ID, which indicates the
shooting status of the clip.
USER CLIP NAME:
ꢁ
PressꢁtheꢁTHUMBNAILꢁbutton.
• The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD
monitor.
1
Displays the clip name specified by the user.
*
VIDEO: Displays [FRAME RATE] (frame rate of the clip),
[PULL DOWN], and [ASPECT RATIO].
NOTE
Press the THUMBNAIL button while pressing DISP/
MODE CHK button when a thumbnail is displayed to
move to step 4.
AUDIO: [SAMPLING RATE] (sampling frequency of
recorded sound) and [BITS PER SAMPLE]
(digitized bit[s] of recorded sound).
ACCESS: Displays [CREATOR] (person who recorded the
clip), [CREATION DATE] (date when the clip was
recorded), [LAST UPDATE DATE] (date of the
latest update of the clip), and [LAST UPDATE
PERSON] (person who made the latest update of
the clip).
ꢁ
3
PressꢁtheꢁMENUꢁbuttonꢁandꢁSelectꢁMETAꢁDATAꢁ
ꢁLOADꢁfromꢁtheꢁthumbnailꢁmenu,ꢁandꢁpressꢁ
theꢁSETꢁbutton.
DEVICE: Displays [MANUFACTURER] (name of the
device manufacturer), [SERIAL NO.] (serial
number of the device) and [MODEL NAME]
(model name of the device).
:
2
SHOOT
*
Displays [SHOOTER] (name of the person who
shot the video), [START DATE] (start date of
shooting), [END DATE] (end date of shooting),
and [LOCATION] ALTITUDE/LONGITUDE/
LATITUDE/SOURCE/PLACE NAME (altitude,
longitude, latitude, and source of the information
and name of the location).
SCENARIO:
ꢁ
4
MetaꢁDataꢁnamesꢁofꢁmetadataꢁuploadꢁfilesꢁ
storedꢁonꢁtheꢁSDꢁmemoryꢁcardꢁareꢁdisplayed.ꢁ
Selectꢁtheꢁdesiredꢁfilesꢁusingꢁtheꢁcursorꢁ
buttons,ꢁandꢁchooseꢁYES.
Displays [PROGRAM NAME], [SCENE NO.], and
[TAKE NO.].
NEWS: Displays [REPORTER] (name of the reporter),
[PURPOSE] (purpose of shooting), and
[OBJECT] (object of shooting).
• Uploading starts.
• Uploaded metadata is retained even if the power
is turned off.
• For more information on confirmation of uploaded
data, see [Checking and modifying read
metadata] (page 98).
1 The USER CLIP NAME recording method is selectable.
*
For details, refer to [Selecting the USER CLIP NAME
recording method] (page 99).
2 During recording, the camera does not automatically set
altitude, latitude and longitude of the shoot.
*
Such data can be set in the property of a recorded clip.
NOTE
Press the cursor button (q) when the Meta Data name is
displayed to change the display to the file name. Press the
cursor button (w) to return to display of the Meta Data name.
ꢅꢃ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMO: Displays [NO.] (the number of the text memo),
[OFFSET] (location of the frame with added text
memo in relation to the beginning of the clip),
[PERSON] (person who recorded the text memo
added to the clip), and [TEXT] (contents of the
text memo).
ꢁ
4
Whileꢁviewingꢁmetadataꢁsettings,ꢁuseꢁtheꢁcursorꢁ
buttonsꢁtoꢁmoveꢁtheꢁpointerꢁtoꢁtheꢁdesiredꢁ
option.ꢁThen,ꢁpressꢁtheꢁSETꢁbutton.ꢁ
• A soft keyboard screen is displayed, allowing you
to modify the setting.
THUMBNAIL:
Displays the location of the frame (frame offset)
and the size (height and width) of the image
selected as the thumbnail image.
PROXY: Displays the information for a proxy, such as its
format, when a proxy is attached.
NOTE
This unit only displays printable ASCII characters.
Checking and modifying read metadata
The unit allows you to check details of metadata read from
SD memory cards.
To set whether or not the uploaded
metadata is recorded
ꢁ
PressꢁtheꢁTHUMBNAILꢁbutton.
1
2
Set “ON”/“OFF” in META DATA RECORD from the
thumbnail menu. The factory setting is “OFF”.
• The metadata is added to the clip on the card in card slot
L only.
• The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD
monitor.
ꢁ
PressꢁtheꢁMENUꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁselectꢁMETAꢁDATAꢁ
ꢁPROPERTYꢁfromꢁtheꢁthumbnailꢁmenu.ꢁ
• Then the screen shown below appears.
ꢁ
3
Useꢁtheꢁcursorꢁbuttonsꢁtoꢁmoveꢁtheꢁpointerꢁtoꢁ
theꢁitemꢁtoꢁconfirmꢁandꢁpressꢁtheꢁSETꢁbutton.
• Use this function to check loaded metadata
settings.
ꢅꢄ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ExampleꢁofꢁAVC-Iꢁ100
Recordingꢁstart
Selecting the USER CLIP NAME recording
method
Recordingꢁpause
Recordingꢁdurationꢁ=ꢁApprox.ꢃꢁmin
Select META DATA USER CLIP NAME from the thumbnail
menu to select the recording method. Two options are
available: TYPE1 and TYPE2.
Clipꢁ1ꢁ Clipꢁꢀꢁ
COUNTꢁvalueꢁ
=ꢁ0001
COUNTꢁvalueꢁ
=ꢁ000ꢀ
TYPE1(Factoryꢁdefaults)
USER CLIP NAME to be
recorded
Approx.ꢁ5ꢁmin
Approx.ꢁꢀꢁmin
If clip metadata has been
Uploaded data
read in
If the clip thumbnails are displayed as shown in the
example above or their properties are indicated using a P2
device, the thumbnail and COUNT value of clip 1 will be
displayed.
If no clip metadata has been
read in or if the setting for
recording clip metadata has
been turned off
Same as GLOBAL CLIP ID
(UMID data)
Clearing uploaded metadata
TYPEꢀ
Select META DATA INITIALIZE from the thumbnail
menu, and press the SET button. Select YES when the
confirmation screen is displayed.
USER CLIP NAME to be
recorded
Uploaded data + COUNT
If clip metadata has been
read in
If no clip metadata has been
read in or if the setting for
recording clip metadata has
been turned off
1
value
*
Same as CLIP ID NAME
1 The COUNT value is indicated as a four-digit number.
The COUNT value is incremented each time a new clip
is captured if clip metadata has been read in and TYPE2
has been selected as the recording method.
*
The COUNT value can be reset using the following
procedure.
Select META DATA PROPERTY from the thumbnail
menu, then select USER CLIP NAME to display the menu
shown below. Select “COUNT RESET” with the cursor
and press the SET button to reset the COUNT value to 1.
NOTE
When an 8 GB or larger capacity P2 is used and the recording
session exceeds the prescribed duration (AVC-Intra100: about
5 minutes; AVC-Intra50: about 10 minutes), the recording will
automatically be split into separate clips. At this time, each clip
will be provided with its own COUNT value.
ꢅꢅ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Formatting a P2 Card
Formatting SD Memory Cards
SD memory cards can also be formatted from the
thumbnail screen. With an SD memory card inserted into
the unit, perform the following operation:
ꢁ
ꢁ
PressꢁtheꢁTHUMBNAILꢁbutton.
1
• The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD
monitor.
ꢁ
PressꢁtheꢁTHUMBNAILꢁbutton.
1
2
• The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD
monitor.
PressꢁtheꢁMENUꢁbuttonꢁandꢁselectꢁ
OPERATIONꢁꢁFORMATꢁfromꢁtheꢁthumbnailꢁ
menu.ꢁ
2
ꢁ
PressꢁtheꢁMENUꢁbuttonꢁandꢁselectꢁ
OPERATIONꢁꢁFORMATꢁfromꢁtheꢁthumbnailꢁ
menu.ꢁ
• When the screen shown below appears, select
ALL P2 and press the SET button.
• Select EXIT if formatting is not required.
• Select “SD CARD” and press the SET button when
the screen shown below appears.
• Select “EXIT” if formatting is not required.
ꢁ
3
Theꢁfollowingꢁscreenꢁappears.ꢁUseꢁtheꢁcursorꢁ
buttonsꢁandꢁtheꢁSETꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁselectꢁYES.
ꢁ
3
Whenꢁtheꢁfollowingꢁscreenꢁappears,ꢁuseꢁtheꢁ
cursorꢁbuttonsꢁandꢁtheꢁSETꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁselectꢁ
YES.
• The two P2 cards inserted in card slots L and R
are formatted simultaneously
NOTE
• Check that no important data remains on a card
before formatting since data erased by formatting
cannot be recovered.
• The SD memory card is formatted.
NOTE
• If there are clips that are not displayed on the
thumbnail screen when formatting, a warning
“FORMAT ALL P2 CARD? (INCLUDING CLIP OF
OTHER REC MODE)” is displayed.
• You can also use the menu option SD CARD FORMAT in the
CARD FUNCTIONS screen to format SD memory cards.
For details, refer to [Formatting, Writing and Reading an SD
Memory Card] (page 79).
• Check that no important data remains on a card before
formatting since data erased by formatting cannot be
recovered.
100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DATE FORMAT:
Setting the Thumbnail Display
Mode
The thumbnail display mode can be customized to suit
your preferences.
You can specify the display order for the
shooting date as either Year/Month/Day (Y-M-D),
Month/Day/Year (M-D-Y) or Day/Month/Year (D-
M-Y). The factory default setting is Month/Day/
Year. (The factory default setting is Day/Month/
Year when the area setting is PAL.)
This setting is reflected in the recording date
shown in the clip property and the shooting date
shown when DATE is selected under the item
DATA DISPLAY.
ꢁ
ꢁ
PressꢁtheꢁTHUMBNAILꢁbutton.
1
• The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD
monitor.
THUMBNAIL SIZE:
For the size of thumbnails displayed on one
screen, either LARGE (3 X 2 thumbnails
displayed) or NORMAL (4 X 3 thumbnails
displayed) can be selected. The factory default
value is NORMAL.
PressꢁtheꢁMENUꢁbuttonꢁandꢁselectꢁ
THUMBNAILꢁꢁSETUPꢁfromꢁtheꢁthumbnailꢁ
menu.ꢁ
2
• The following screen appears.
PLAYBACK RESUME:
Selecting a position to restart playback after
stopping playback on the thumbnails screen
using the STOP button.
ON:
OFF:
Playback starts from the stop position.
Playback starts from the beginning of
the clip indicated by the pointer.
Note that if the pointer is moved after stopping
playback, the playback will restart from the
beginning of the clip indicated by the pointer
regardless of this setting.
THUMBNAIL INIT:
INDICATOR:
Returns the above thumbnail display settings
to their factory default values. Move the cursor
to this option, and press the SET button. Select
YES in the confirmation screen that appears.
Select which indicators you want to show on
thumbnails and which you want to hide.
• ALL HIDE:
ON:
OFF:
No indicators are displayed.
EXIT:
Indication/No indication will be set
depending on the following menu.
The factory settings are as follows.
Returns to the previous menu.
• MARKER:
Switches the shot mark marker between
indication and no indication (ON/OFF). The
factory setting is ON (indication).
• TEXT MEMO:
Switches the text memo marker between
indication and no indication (ON/OFF). The
factory setting is ON (indication).
• PROXY:
Switches the proxy marker between
indication and no indication (ON/OFF). The
factory setting is ON (indication).
DATA DISPLAY:
The time display field of the clip offers a choice
of Time Code (TC), User Bits (UB), Shooting
Time (TIME), Shooting Date (DATE), Shooting
Date and Time (DATE/TIME), Clip Name (CLIP
NAME) or USER CLIP NAME. The factory setting
is Time Code.
101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
Clip Meta Data
Properties
Properties display clip properties and P2 card status.
It is possible to edit and rewrite recorded clip metadata
while clip properties are displayed.
Displays more detailed data about the clip. Use the
cursor buttons to move the pointer, and press the
SET button to check the detailed content. For more
information on displayed metadata, see [Setting of Clip
Meta Data] (page 97).
Clip Property
Modification of recorded clip metadata
From the thumbnail menu, select PROPERTY CLIP
PROPERTY. The following screen appears.
ꢁ
Displayꢁtheꢁwindowꢁforꢁdetailedꢁclipꢁmetadataꢁ
thatꢁyouꢁintendꢁtoꢁmodifyꢁinꢁtheꢁclipꢁpropertiesꢁ
window.
1
2
1
2
3
ꢁ
Placeꢁtheꢁcursorꢁonꢁtheꢁitemꢁtoꢁbeꢁmodifiedꢁ
usingꢁtheꢁcursorꢁbutton.ꢁ
• The metadata that can be modified are shown like
[USER CLIP NAME] in the following figure.
4
5
1
2
3
Clip Number
Thumbnail
Clip Information
Indicates the indicators added to the clip or the number
of text/voice memos attached to the clip. The mark
appears if the clip is recorded on a write-protected P2
card.
ꢁ
3
PressꢁtheꢁSETꢁbutton.
4
Clip Information
Displays detailed information about the clip.
• The input window (soft keyboard) for modifying
metadata is displayed.
• Use the keyboard to modify the metadata.
CLIP NAME:
Display clip names.
START TC:
The time code value at the start of the recording.
START UB:
The user bit value at the start of the recording.
DATE:
The date of the recording.
TIME:
The time at the start of the recording.
DURATION:
The time length of the clip.
V_FORMAT:
Use the keyboard operations described in
The recording format for the clip.
[Checking and modifying read metadata] (page 98).
FRAME RATE:
The frame rate for the playback.
ꢁ
4
PressꢁOKꢁonꢁtheꢁkeyboard.
REC RATE:
• The modified metadata are written on the clip, and
the metadata window is restored.
The recording frame rate is displayed. (Only
displayed for clips recorded using native recording
with the VFR function.)
10ꢀ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents of P2 Card Status Display
NOTE
Settings
• LOCATION (recording location data) data for a SHOOT
cannot be deleted independently.Thus by setting ALTITUDE
to empty will also delete the LONGITUDE and LATITUDE
settings.
From the thumbnail menu, select PROPERTY CARD
STATUS. The following screen appears.
!
• The metadata for a clip with the
cannot be modified.
incomplete clip indicator
Whenꢁ“REMAIN”ꢁisꢁselected:
• The clip meta data for a clip cannot be modified if the source
of clip is inserted in a wrong orientation in P2 card slot L
and R or if the source of a 3D or 2D LL clip is not inserted in
either slot L or R.
1
2
3
P2 Card Status Display
5
4
P2 Card Status Display Settings
Select PROPERTY CARD STATUS from the thumbnail
menu to set the desired indication mode (remaining free
space or used memory capacity) for the P2 card status
display.
ꢁ
PressꢁtheꢁTHUMBNAILꢁbutton.
1
2
1
Write-protect mark
The mark appears if the P2 card is write-protected.
• The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD
monitor.
2
L/R P2 card status (remaining free space)
The remaining memory capacity of the P2 card is indicated
by a bar graph and percentage. The bar graph indicator
moves to the left as the remaining free space decreases.
The following indications may appear, depending on the
card status:
ꢁ
PressꢁtheꢁMENUꢁbuttonꢁandꢁselectꢁPROPERTYꢁ
ꢁPROPERTYꢁSETUPꢁꢁPꢀꢁCARDꢁCAPꢁfromꢁ
theꢁthumbnailꢁmenu.
• The following screen appears. Select the P2 card
status display settings from the P2 CARD CAP
menu option.
FORMAT ERROR!:
An unformatted P2 card is inserted.
NOT SUPPORTED!:
An unsupported card is inserted in the camera.
NO CARD!:
No P2 cards are inserted.
Use the cursor button to place the cursor on the P2
card for data you want to access and press the SET
button to display detailed information about the P2
card to check individual information such as the serial
number and the user ID.
3
L/R P2 card remaining capacity/total capacity
Displays the P2 card remaining capacity and total
capacity in minutes. The digits representing less than
minutes are rounded down.
REMAIN:
Note that the indicated capacity will vary according to
the frame rate in native recording with VFR operation.
The remaining capacity becomes 0 with a P2 card on
which the number of recorded clips reached the limit or
with a write-protected P2 card.
Show remaining free space on the P2 card as
the P2 card status display. (Factory setting)
USED:
Show used memory capacity on the P2 card as
the P2 card status display.
4
5
Remaining 3D/2D LL recording capacity
Displays the remaining capacity for recording,
calculated from the remaining free space of the P2
cards inserted in card slots L and R.
Warning symbol
Inserting the following type of P2 cards will display the
(
) symbol.
103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RUN DOWN CARD:
4
5
Used 3D/2D LL recording capacity
The maximum number of overwrites on the P2 card
has been exceeded.
Displays the used memory capacity for recording,
calculated from the used memory capacity of the P2
cards inserted into card slots L and R.
DIR ENTRY NG CARD:
The directory structure on the P2 card is not
supported.
Warning symbol
• For details on P2 card status indications, refer to [2.
L/R P2 card status (remaining free space)].
• If the number of recorded clips reaches the limit
(1000) on the P2 card status indicator, “OVER MAX
NUMBER CLIPS” is displayed in the WARNING field.
Inserting the following type of P2 cards will display the
(
) symbol.
RUN DOWN CARD:
The maximum number of overwrites on the P2 card
has been exceeded.
DIR ENTRY NG CARD:
Whenꢁ“USED”ꢁisꢁselected:
The directory structure on the P2 card is not
supported.
1
2
• For details on P2 card status indications, refer to [2.
L/R P2 card status (used memory capacity)]
• If the number of recorded clips reaches the limit
(1000) on the P2 card status indicator, “OVER MAX
NUMBER CLIPS” is displayed in the WARNING field.
3
5
4
SD memory card Status Display
The status display enables a confirmation of the SD
memory card formatted condition, available memory
capacity etc. From the thumbnail menu, select PROPERTY
DEVICES SD CARD.
If the format is compatible with SD standards, the message
1
Write-protect mark
The mark appears if the P2 card is write-protected.
SD STANDARD : SUPPORTED
2
L/R P2 card status (used memory capacity)
The used memory capacity of the P2 card is indicated
by a bar graph and a percentage figure. The bar
graph indicator moves to the right as the used memory
capacity increases.
If the format is not compatible with SD standards, the
message
SD STANDARD : NOT SUPPORTED
The following indications may appear, depending on
the card status:
is displayed. If this is the case, writing or reading will
not be successful. Format the card with the unit. For
more information on formatting SD memory cards, see
[Formatting SD Memory Cards] (page 100).
FORMAT ERROR!:
An unformatted P2 card is inserted.
NOT SUPPORTED!:
An unsupported card is inserted in the camera.
NO CARD!:
P2 cards are not inserted.
Use the cursor button to place the cursor on the P2
card for data you want to access and press the SET
button to display detailed information about the P2
card to check individual information such as the serial
number and the user ID.
3
L/R P2 card used memory capacity/total capacity
Displays the used memory capacity on a P2 card and
the total capacity in minutes. The digits representing
less than minutes are rounded down. The used memory
capacity of a write-protected P2 card is displayed as
100 %.
Note that the indicated capacity will vary according to
the frame rate in native recording with VFR operation.
104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saving the Log Data
Equipment log data can also be stored in an SD memory
card from the thumbnail screen. With an SD memory card
inserted in the unit, perform the following operation:
ꢁ
PressꢁtheꢁTHUMBNAILꢁbutton.
1
2
• The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD
monitor.
ꢁ
PressꢁtheꢁMENUꢁbuttonꢁandꢁselectꢁ
OPERATIONꢁ➝ꢁLOGꢁDATAꢁfromꢁtheꢁthumbnailꢁ
menu.
ꢁ
3
Whenꢁtheꢁfollowingꢁscreenꢁappears,ꢁuseꢁtheꢁ
cursorꢁbuttonsꢁandꢁtheꢁSETꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁselectꢁ
YES.
ꢁ
4
PressꢁtheꢁSETꢁbutton.
• Log data are saved in the SD memory card.
105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 Menu Operations
LCD Monitor/Viewfinder Menus
Using the Menus
Use the setup menus to change the settings to suit the
scenes you are shooting or what you are recording.
To operate the menu, you can use the MENU button and
JOG dial button on the lens unit, or the MENU, cursor, and
SET buttons on the side of the unit.
ꢁ
2
UseꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbuttonꢁorꢁtheꢁcursorꢁbuttonsꢁ
(er)ꢁtoꢁhighlightꢁtheꢁfunctionꢁyouꢁwishꢁtoꢁ
change.
MAIN MENU
1.SCENE FILE
2.SYSTEM SETUP
3.SW MODE
• If the thumbnail menu is displayed, press the
THUMBNAIL button to clear the display.
• The menu items indicated in the blue characters cannot
be used.
4.RECORDING SETUP
5.AUDIO SETUP
6.OUTPUT SEL
7.DISPLAY SETUP
8.BATTERY SETUP
PUSH MENU TO EXIT
ꢁ
3
PressꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbuttonꢁorꢁtheꢁSETꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁ
displayꢁtheꢁitems.
d c
SW MODE
LOW GAIN
MID GAIN
HIGH GAIN
USER MAIN
USER1
0dB
6dB
12dB
PUSH AF
Y GET
USER2
SHOT MARK
REC CHECK
MIX/R
RET
LCD/EVF
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
ꢁ
ꢀ4
UUseꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbuttonꢁorꢁtheꢁcursorꢁbuttonsꢁ
a b
(er)ꢁtoꢁhighlightꢁtheꢁitemꢁyouꢁwishꢁtoꢁchange.
SW MODE
a
b
c
d
JOG dial button
MENU button
LOW GAIN
MID GAIN
HIGH GAIN
USER MAIN
USER1
0dB
6dB
MENU button
12dB
Cursor and SET buttons
PUSH AF
Y GET
USER2
SHOT MARK
REC CHECK
MIX/R
RET
ꢁ
PressꢁtheꢁMENUꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁendꢁanyꢁmodeꢁotherꢁ
thanꢁrecording.
1
LCD/EVF
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
• Hold down the MENU button for about 1 second.
• The function screen appears on the LCD monitor
and in the viewfinder.
MAIN MENU
1.SCENE FILE
2.SYSTEM SETUP
3.SW MODE
4.RECORDING SETUP
5.AUDIO SETUP
6.OUTPUT SEL
7.DISPLAY SETUP
8.BATTERY SETUP
PUSH MENU TO EXIT
10ꢂ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To initialize the scene file
ꢁ
5
PressꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbuttonꢁorꢁtheꢁSETꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁ
changeꢁtheꢁsettingꢁvalue.
Select INITIAL in LOAD/SAVE/INIT of the SCENE FILE
screen. The settings for the scene file selected in FILE
SELECT of the SCENE FILE screen will return to the factory
settings.
SW MODE
LOW GAIN
MID GAIN
HIGH GAIN
USER MAIN
USER1
0dB
3dB
6dB
• This does not affect any other scene files.
9dB
PUAF
Initializing user files and scene files
simultaneously
12dB
Y T
USER2
SHOT MARK
REC CHECK
MIX/R
RET
LCD/EVF
You can return the user files and the six scene files to their
factory defaults by selecting YES in the menu option MENU
INIT in the OTHER FUNCTIONS screen.
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
• The TIME ZONE setting does not return to its factory
default.
ꢁ
ꢁ
Toꢁchangeꢁotherꢁsettings,ꢁrepeatꢁstepsꢁ4ꢁandꢁ5.
6
• When you finish, press the MENU button to return
to the function screen.
Toꢁchangeꢁotherꢁfunctions,ꢁrepeatꢁstepsꢁꢀꢁtoꢁ5.
7
• To exit the function screen and return to the normal
screen, press the MENU button again.
NOTE
Direct close function
When the MENU button is pressed and held down after making
a menu setting, the setting menu screen closes without first
returning to the previous setting menu.
ꢀTo quickly change settings (MASTER PED and H PHASE
only)
• Fast UP
Hold down the JOG dial button while turning it upwards
and maintain this position. Or, hold the cursor button ()
pressed.
• Fast DOWN
Hold down the JOG dial button while turning it downwards
and maintain this position. Or, hold the cursor button ()
pressed.
Initializing the Menu Settings
The menu settings contain both the user file settings and
the scene file settings. You can initialize them separately.
To initialize scene files (i.e. all the
settings other than the scene file
settings)
Select INITIAL in USER FILE of the OTHER FUNCTIONS
screen. The current menu settings of user file will return to
the factory settings.
• The TIME ZONE setting does not return to its factory
default.
10ꢃ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup Menu Structure
MAIN MENU
SCENE FILE
(page 110)
FILE SELECT
LOAD/SAVE/INIT
VFR
SYSTEM MODE
REC FORMAT
REC MODE
SYSTEM SETUP
(page 111)
FRAME RATE
(SYNCHRO SCAN)
DETAIL LEVEL
V DETAIL LEVEL
DETAIL CORING
CHROMA LEVEL
CHROMA PHASE
COLOR TEMP Ach
COLOR TEMP Bch
MASTER PED
A.IRIS LEVEL
GAMMA
SW MODE
(page 113)
LOW GAIN
MID GAIN
HIGH GAIN
USER MAIN
USER1
USER2
RET
LCD/EVF
RECORDING SETUP
(page 113)
REC FUNCTION
INTERVAL TIME
TC MODE
KNEE
MATRIX
NAME EDIT
UB MODE
FRONT VR CH1
FRONT VR CH2
MIC LOWCUT CH1
MIC LOWCUT CH2
MIC LOWCUT CH3
MIC LOWCUT CH4
LIMITER CH1
AUDIO SETUP
(page 114)
OUTPUT SEL
(page 116)
SDI OUT
MON OUT SEL
TC OUT
LIMITER CH2
DISPLAY SETUP
(page 116)
EVF PEAK LEVEL
EVF PEAK FREQ
LCD SETTING
LCD BACKLIGHT
ZEBRA1 DETECT
ZEBRA2 DETECT
ZEBRA2
AUTO LEVEL CH3
AUTO LEVEL CH4
TEST TONE
F.MIC POWER
R.MIC POWER
MONITOR SELECT
F.MIC LEVEL
MARKER
R.MIC CH1 LEVEL
R.MIC CH2 LEVEL
R. LINE LEVEL
SAFETY ZONE
FOCUS BAR
SYNC SCAN DISP
DATE/TIME
HEADROOM
WIRELESS WARN
WIRELESS TYPE
LEVEL METER
ZOOM & FOCUS
CONVERGENCE
CARD/BATT
OTHER DISPLAY
REC COUNTER
EXT DC IN SEL
BATTERY SELECT
BATTERY MODE
HYTRON140 NEAR
DIONIC90 NEAR
DIONIC160 NEAR
ENDURA10 NEAR
PAG L95 NEAR
TYPE A FULL
BATTERY SETUP
(page 117)
TYPE A NEAR
TYPE A END
TYPE B FULL
TYPE B NEAR
TYPE B END
NEAR END CANCEL
10ꢄ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CARD FUNCTIONS
(page 118)
SCENE FILE
USER FILE
SD CARD FORMAT
1
3D ASSIST
*
OUTPUT SEL
NEAR LEVEL
FAR LEVEL
(page 119)
DETECTION RANGE
Z WFM SCALE
OTHER FUNCTIONS
(page 119)
USER FILE
ACCESS LED
ALARM
REC TALLY
EVF BAT LED
CLOCK SETTING
TIME ZONE
H PHASE
GENLOCK SEL
MENU INIT
VERSION
MODEL NAME
SERIAL NO.
OPERATION
DIAGNOSTIC
(page 120)
2
OPTION MENU
*
AREA SELECT
(page 120)
1 The 3D ASSIST screen is not displayed when 2D LL recording mode is set.
2 To open the OPTION MENU, hold down the DISP/MODE CHK button and press the MENU button.
*
*
10ꢅ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup Menu List
SCENE FILE Screen
Item
Setting
Notes
FILE SELECT
Select the file you wish to use for shooting among six • The factory default settings are the
scene files.Select number 1 to 6 that corresponds to
FILE1 to FILE6, respectively.
same for 1 to 6.
LOAD/SAVE/INIT
Loads, saves, and initializes the settings of the scene • This setting does not affect scene files
file selected in FILE SELECT.
that are not the currently selected one.
LOAD: Loads data stored in camera memory.
SAVE: Saves current values in camera memory.
INITIAL: Returns settings to their factory defaults.
VFR
Enables or disables variable frame rate (VFR) mode at • Available only in 720P system mode.
720P.
ON: VFR operation
(This message does not appear in
modes other than 720P.)
OFF: VFR off
FRAME RATE
Adjusts the frame rate and exposure time at 720P
when VFR is on.
• Available only in 720P system mode
and when VFR is set to ON.
• When 59.94 Hz is selected
(This message does not appear in
modes other than 720P.)
• A change to 24 fps may cause the
screen to flicker momentarily.
12, 15, 18, 20, 21, 22, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 30, 32, 34,
36, 40, 44, 48, 54, 60 FRAME
• When 50 Hz is selected
12, 15, 18, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 30, 32,
34, 37, 42, 45, 48, 50 FRAME
Displays synchro scan shutter speeds to enable the
operator to synchronize the camera to computer
monitors.
• This function only displays the shutter speeds. Use
the SYNCHRO SCAN switch to set a shutter speed.
• Set values (displayed values) are assigned to the
current scene file and manipulated using the LOAD,
SAVE and INIT functions.
(SYNCHRO SCAN)
• Displayed in blue when not set to
synchro scan mode and when the
SYNCHRO SCAN switch settings are
not available.
For details, refer to [Placing the Camera-recorder in
SYNCHRO SCAN Mode] (page 49).
• When 59.94 Hz is selected
1/60.0
• When 50 Hz is selected
1/50.0
DETAIL LEVEL
Adjusts the level of image outline correction (in
horizontal and vertical directions).
–7 ... 0 ... +7
V DETAIL LEVEL
DETAIL CORING
Adjusts the level of correction in vertical direction.
–7 ... 0 ... +7
Adjusts the level of noise reduction of the detail signal.
–7 ... +5 ... +7
• Adjust towards – for a clearer image. Noise
increases slightly.
• Adjust towards + for less noise.
Adjusts the chroma level.
–7 ... 0 ... +7
Makes fine adjustments to the chroma phase.
–7 ... 0 ... +7
Makes fine adjustments to the color temperature (after
Ach white balance adjustment).
–7 ... 0 ... +7
CHROMA LEVEL
CHROMA PHASE
COLOR TEMP Ach
COLOR TEMP Bch
Makes fine adjustments to the color temperature (after
Bch white balance adjustment).
–7 ... 0 ... +7
____ indicates the factory setting
110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Item
Setting
Notes
MASTER PED
Adjusts the black master pedestal that serves as the • Hold down the JOG dial button and
video reference.
–100 ... +15 ... +100
turn it downwards or upwards and
maintain this position to quickly
change values.
• When a remote control unit (AJ-
RC10G) or extension control unit (AG-
EC4G) is connected, use the M-PED
control on the remote control unit or
extension control unit to adjust.
A. IRIS LEVEL
GAMMA
Sets the AUTO IRIS target value.
–10 ... 0 ... +10
Selects the gamma curve.
HD NORM: Gamma setting for HD recording.
LOW: Applies a gently rising gamma curve to low-
brightness areas for a balanced look.
HIGH: Applies a steep gamma curve to low brightness
areas to expand the tonality of dark areas for video
with greater brightness. Contrast softens as a result.
B.PRESS: Produces sharper contrast than LOW.
CINE-LIKE D: Applies a gamma curve to produce
video with a cine-like feel.
CINE-LIKE V: Applies a gamma curve to produce
high-contrast video with a cine-like feel.
• A lens aperture set lower than normal video level
(approx. 1/2) is recommended when using cine-like
gamma to enjoy the full benefit of the function.
Sets the compression level (knee point) of the high
brightness video signals received through the MOS
sensor to avoid overexposure.
KNEE
HIGH: High setting (compression starts at approx.
100 %)
MID: Medium setting (compression starts at approx.
90 %)
LOW: Low setting (compression starts at approx.
80 %)
MATRIX
Selects the MATRIX table to reproduce color during
shooting.
NORM1: Ensures proper color rendition when shooting
out in the open or under halogen lighting.
NORM2: Produces more vivid colors than NORM1.
CINE-LIKE: Produces a tone similar to movie film.
Edits the name of the selected scene file.
NAME EDIT
• No names are set for FILE1 to FILE 6
with the factory default settings.
SYSTEM SETUP Screen
Item
Setting
Notes
SYSTEM MODE
Specifies the signal format used by this camera.
1080-59.94i, 1080-23.98PsF, 720-59.94P, 1080-50i,
720-50P
• The factory default setting is 1080-50i
when the area setting is PAL.
• When a setting is changed, the message “TURN
POWER OFF” appears. Then turn the power off and
turn it back on again.
____ indicates the factory setting
111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Item
REC FORMAT
Setting
Selects the recording codec as well as shooting and
recording modes.
Notes
• When SYSTEM MODE is 1080-59.94i:
An AVC-I 100 or AVC-I 50 codec is used for shooting
and recording. Recording and shooting can be
performed at 60i or 30PN (native recording) with each
codec.
AVC-I 100/60i
AVC-I 100/30PN
AVC-I 50/60i
AVC-I 50/30PN
• When SYSTEM MODE is 1080-23.98PsF:
AVC-I 100 or AVC-I 50 codec is used for shooting and
recording. Recording and shooting can be performed
at 24PN (native recording).
AVC-I 100/24PN
AVC-I 50/24PN
• When SYSTEM MODE is 1080-50i:
AVC-I 100 or AVC-I 50 codec is used for shooting and
recording. Recording and shooting can be performed
at 50i or 25PN (native recording) with each codec.
AVC-I 100/50i
AVC-I 100/25PN
AVC-I 50/50i
AVC-I 50/25PN
• When SYSTEM MODE is 720-59.94P:
An AVC-I 100 or AVC-I 50 codec is used for shooting
and recording. Recording and shooting can be
performed at 60P, 30PN (native recording) or 24PN
(native recording) with each codec.
AVC-I 100/60P
AVC-I 100/30PN
AVC-I 100/24PN
AVC-I 50/60P
AVC-I 50/30PN
AVC-I 50/24PN
• When SYSTEM MODE is 720-50P:
An AVC-I 100 or AVC-I 50 codec is used for shooting
and recording. Recording and shooting can be
performed at 50P or 25PN (native recording) with each
codec.
AVC-I 100/50P
AVC-I 100/25PN
AVC-I 50/50P
AVC-I 50/25PN
REC MODE
Sets the recording mode of this unit.
3D: Recording 3D images.
2D LL: Recording the left-lens (L) image on two P2
• The following functions are disabled
when REC MODE is set to 2D LL.
- LCD/EVF button
cards inserted in P2 card slots L and R simultaneously. - 3D MODE selector switch
• When the setting is changed, the message “TURN
POWER OFF” appears. Then turn the power off and
back on again.
- CONV. (convergence) dial
- 3D ASSIST buttons
- 3D FINE function
• Clip meta data and shot marks are
added to the clip in the P2 card in
card slot L.
____ indicates the factory setting
11ꢀ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SW MODE Screen
Item
Setting
Notes
LOW GAIN
Sets the gain value assigned to the L position of the
GAIN switch.
0dB, 3dB, 6dB, 9dB, 12dB
MID GAIN
Sets the gain value assigned to the M position of the
GAIN switch.
0dB, 3dB, 6dB, 9dB, 12dB
HIGH GAIN
USER MAIN
Sets the gain value assigned to the H position of the
GAIN switch.
0dB, 3dB, 6dB, 9dB, 12dB
Sets the function assigned to the USER MAIN button.
PUSH AF,Y-GET, SHOT MARK, REC CHECK,
R CONV, 3D A.Z WFM, 3D A.ALERT, 3D A.CONV.
For details, refer to [Assigning Functions to USER
Buttons] (page 50).
USER1
USER2
Sets a function assigned to the USER1 button. The
functions that can be assigned to this button are the
same as for the USER MAIN button.
Y-GET
For details, refer to [Assigning Functions to USER
Buttons] (page 50).
Sets a function assigned to the USER2 button.
PUSH AF,Y-GET, SHOT MARK, REC CHECK, 3D A.Z
WFM, 3D A.ALERT, 3D A.CONV.
For details, refer to [Assigning Functions to USER
Buttons] (page 50).
RET
Sets the function assigned to the RET button on the
lens.
REC CHECK, RETURN
LCD/EVF
Sets the images on the LCD monitor and in the
viewfinder that you can select by pressing the LCD/
EVF button.
MIX: Normal image (left-lens image) or MIX image
MIX/R: Normal image, MIX image or right-lens image
ALL: Normal image, MIX image, right-lens image or
Side by Side image
• The normal image (left-lens image) is displayed
immediately after the unit is turned on or when
normal playback is performed.
RECORDING SETUP Screen
Item
Setting
Notes
REC FUNCTION
Sets special recording modes.
• This item is not available when native
NORMAL: The special recording modes are not used. recording is selected in REC FORMAT.
INTERVAL: Sets interval recording.
• This function is always set to NORMAL when the
power is turned on.
INTERVAL TIME
Sets the time interval of interval recording.
2frm, 4frm, 8frm, 16frm, 1s, 2s, 5s, 10s, 30s, 1min,
5min, 10min
• Available only when REC FUNCTION
is set to INTERVAL.
For details, refer to [Interval Recording (INTERVAL
REC)] (page 40).
____ indicates the factory setting
113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Item
Setting
Sets count correction when using the internal time
code generator.
DF: Drop frame time code
NDF: Non drop frame time code
Notes
TC MODE
UB MODE
• This item is not available when
SYSTEM MODE is set to 50 Hz.
It cannot be set and the item is
displayed in blue when SYSTEM
For details, refer to [Setting the Time Code] (page 63). MODE is set to 23.98 Hz and REC
FORMAT is 24PN. In both cases, the
count correction is fixed to NDF.
Sets the data recorded in the camera user bits.
USER,TIME, DATE, EXT,TCG, FRM.RATE
For details, refer to [Setting User Bits] (page 61).
AUDIO SETUP Screen
Item
Setting
Notes
FRONT VR CH1
Enables/disables the F. AUDIO LEVEL control of CH1 • When the AUDIO SELECT CH1 switch
input.
is set to AUTO and auto adjustment
mode is active, the the F. AUDIO
LEVEL control is disabled regardless
of these settings.
FRONT: Enables the F. AUDIO LEVEL control of
microphone input to CH1.
W.L.: Enables the F. AUDIO LEVEL control of audio
from a wireless receiver input to CH1.
REAR: Enables the F. AUDIO LEVEL control of rear
input that is input to CH1.
ALL: Enables the F. AUDIO LEVEL control when front,
wireless, rear and other inputs are input to CH1.
OFF: Disables the F. AUDIO LEVEL control of CH1.
FRONT VR CH2
Enables/disables the F. AUDIO LEVEL control of CH2 • When the AUDIO SELECT CH2 switch
input.
is set to AUTO and auto adjustment
mode is active, the F. AUDIO LEVEL
control is disabled regardless of these
settings.
Same setting as FRONT VR CH1.
OFF
1
Sets the CH1 microphone low-cut filter.
FRONT: Operates for the front microphone input.
W.L.: Operates for wireless receiver input.
REAR: Operates for the rear microphone input.
OFF: Turns off the filter for all inputs.
Sets the CH2 microphone low-cut filter.
Same setting as MIC LOWCUT CH1.
OFF
Sets the CH3 microphone low-cut filter.
Same setting as MIC LOWCUT CH1.
OFF
Sets the CH4 microphone low-cut filter.
Same setting as MIC LOWCUT CH1.
OFF
MIC LOWCUT CH1
*
1
1
1
MIC LOWCUT CH2
MIC LOWCUT CH3
MIC LOWCUT CH4
LIMITER CH1
*
*
*
Sets the CH1 limiter.
• When the AUDIO SELECT CH1 switch
is set to AUTO and auto adjustment
mode is active, the limiter is disabled
regardless of these settings.
ON, OFF
LIMITER CH2
Sets the CH2 limiter.
ON, OFF
• When the AUDIO SELECT CH2 switch
is set to AUTO and auto adjustment
mode is active, the limiter is disabled
regardless of these settings.
1 The frequency characteristics for a microphone low-cut filter is 200 Hz – 10 kHz.
*
____ indicates the factory setting
114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Item
Setting
Notes
AUTO LEVEL CH3
Selects the method for setting CH3 level.
ON: Engages the auto adjustment mode. The limiter is
not available.
OFF: Locks the level. The limiter operates on all inputs
except the line input of the rear.
AUTO LEVEL CH4
TEST TONE
Selects the method for setting CH4 level.
Same setting as AUTO LEVEL CH3.
ON
Selects the test signal.
NORMAL: Outputs test tones to channels 1, 2, 3 and
4 when the OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE selector switch is
set to BARS and the AUDIO IN switch CH1 is set to
FRONT.
ALWAYS: Outputs test tones to channels 1, 2, 3 and
4 at all times when the OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE selector
switch is set to BARS.
CHSEL: Outputs test tones to channels selected by
setting the AUDIO IN switch CH1 or CH2 to FRONT
and the OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE selector switch is set to
BARS. (Test tones are not output to CH3 and CH4.)
OFF: Does not output a test tone.
Turns on and off the phantom power supply for the
front microphone.
F.MIC POWER
R.MIC POWER
ON, OFF
Turns on and off the phantom power supply for the
rear microphone.
ON: Turns on the phantom power supply to the
microphone when the rear MIC/LINE selector switch is
set to MIC and the +48V ON/OFF switch is set to ON.
OFF: Does not supply phantom power to the
microphone even when the rear MIC/LINE selector
switch is set to MIC and the +48V ON/OFF switch is
set to ON.
MONITOR SELECT
Switches the output signal to earphones and speaker
when the MONITOR SELECT switch is set to ST.
STEREO, MIX
F.MIC LEVEL
Selects the input level for the front microphone.
–40dB, –50dB
R.MIC CH1 LEVEL
Selects the input level for the rear microphone
connected to CH1.
–50dB, –60dB
R.MIC CH2 LEVEL
Selects the input level for the rear microphone
connected to CH2.
–50dB, –60dB
R.LINE LEVEL
HEADROOM
Selects the input level for the rear line input.
+4dB, 0dB, -3dB
Sets the headroom (standard level).
18dB, 20dB
• The factory default setting is 18dB
when the area setting is PAL.
WIRELESS WARN
Sets whether a warning should be output when
wireless receiver reception is poor.
ON, OFF
WIRELESS TYPE
Selects wireless receiver type.
SINGLE: 1-channel receiver
DUAL: 2-channel receiver
• When DUAL is selected for a 1-channel wireless
receiver, CH2 and CH4 will stay mute.
____ indicates the factory setting
115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OUTPUT SEL Screen
Item
Setting
Notes
SDI OUT
Selects the signal to be output from the HD SDI OUT • No signals are output from the HDMI
1 (L)/2 (R) connectors and HD SDI MONITOR OUT
connector.
connector when this item is set to ON
or ON (SIDE).
ON: The HD SDI OUT 1 (L)/2 (R) connectors output
the left-lens (L) image and the right-lens (R) image.
The HD SDI MONITOR OUT connector outputs the
same image as that selected with the menu option
MONTIOR OUT SEL.
ON (SIDE): The HD SDI OUT 1 (L)/2 (R) connectors
output the SIDE by SIDE image. The HD SDI
MONITOR OUT connector outputs the same image
as that selected with the menu option MONTIOR OUT
SEL.
OFF: The HD SDI OUT 1 (L)/2 (R) connectors and the
HD SDI MONITOR OUT connector output no signals.
If a monitor is connected to the HDMI connector, an
image compatible with the monitor is output from the
HDMI connector.
MON OUT SEL
Selects the image to be output from the HD SDI
MONITOR OUT connector and HDMI connector.
NORMAL: The same image as that displayed on the
LCD monitor is output.
L: The left-lens (L) image is output.
MIX: The mixed left-lens (L) image and right-lens (R)
image is output.
• When SDI OUT is set to OFF, no image
is output from the HD SDI MONITOR
OUT connector, regardless of this item
setting. When you wish to output the
effect of the 3D assist function, set
SDI OUT to a setting other than OFF
and this item to NORMAL. (The signal
of the 3D assist function is not output
from the HDMI connector.)
SIDE: The SIDE by SIDE image is output.
TC OUT
Sets the time code type output from the TC OUT
connector.
TCG: Outputs the time code generator value of the
camera at all times.
TCG/TCR: Outputs time code generator value during
camera recording and outputs the played back time
code during video playback.
DISPLAY SETUP Screen
Item
Setting
Notes
EVF PEAK LEVEL
EVF PEAK FREQ
LCD SETTING
Adjusts the peaking level of the LCD monitor and
viewfinder.
-7 ... 0 ... +7
Adjusts the peaking frequency of the LCD monitor and
viewfinder.
HIGH, LOW
Makes it possible to set video color level, brightness
and contrast displayed in the LCD monitor in a
subscreen.
(Subscreen)
LCD COLOR LEVEL
LCD BRIGHTNESS
LCD CONTRAST
LCD BACKLIGHT
Adjusts LCD monitor backlight brightness.
HIGH, NORMAL, LOW
____ indicates the factory setting
11ꢂ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Item
ZEBRA1 DETECT
Setting
Sets the level of the right-leaning zebra pattern 1.
50% ... 70% ... 109%
Notes
ZEBRA2 DETECT
ZEBRA2
Sets the level of the left-leaning zebra pattern 2.
50% ... 85% ... 109%
Selects ZEBRA2 type. (For details, refer to page 74.)
ON, SPOT, OFF
MARKER
Turns the center marker displayed on the LCD monitor
and in the viewfinder on and off. (For details, refer to
page 74.)
ON, OFF
SAFETY ZONE
FOCUS BAR
Sets the safety zone displayed on the LCD monitor
and in the viewfinder. (For details, refer to page 74.)
90%, 13:9, 14:9, OFF
The length of the focus bar indicates accuracy of
focusing.
• The indication disappears when the
LCD monitor screen is switched to the
R (right lens) image, MIX image, or
Side-by-Side image. The display will
reappear when the L (left) image is
restored.
ON: Displays the focus bar.
OFF: Does not display the focus bar.
• The indication disappears when a
menu is displayed.
SYNC SCAN DISP
DATE/TIME
Selects synchro scan shutter display.
sec: Indicates shutter speed in fractions.
deg: Provides a shutter angle indication.
Sets the date and time display.
TIME: Hours, minutes and second display
DATE: Year, month and day display
TIME&DATE: Hours, minutes, seconds and year,
month and day display
• Brightness may change when settings
are modified.
OFF: Not displayed
LEVEL METER
Sets the Audio Level Meter display.
ON, OFF
ZOOM & FOCUS
Sets the display of the lens zoom value and focus
value.
ON, OFF
CONVERGENCE
CARD/BATT
Sets the display of the position of the reference place
for 3D recording (relative value).
ON, OFF
Sets the remaining P2 card capacity and battery
charge.
ON, OFF
OTHER DISPLAY
REC COUNTER
Sets display of other data.
ON: Displays all data.
OFF: Not displayed
Selects counter operation during recording.
TOTAL: Provides a continuous count until reset by
pressing the COUNTER RESET button.
CLIP: Clears the count value at start of recording and
counts time of recording.
BATTERY SETUP Screen
Item
Setting
Notes
EXT DC IN SEL
Selects external DC power supply type.
AC ADAPTOR: AC adaptor
BATTERY: Battery
____ indicates the factory setting
11ꢃ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Item
Setting
Notes
BATTERY SELECT
Sets the battery type.
HYTRON140, DIONIC90, DIONIC160, ENDURA10,
PAG L95,TYPE A,TYPE B
BATTERY MODE
Sets near end.
AUTO: Automatically selects one of the battery types
selected in BATTERY SELECT.
MANUAL: Manually sets the near end voltage.
Sets the near end voltage for HYTRON140.
(Adjustable in 0.1 V units.)
11.0 V ... 13.5 V ... 15.0 V
Sets the near end voltage for DIONIC90. (Adjustable
in 0.1 V units.)
11.0 V ... 13.4 V ... 15.0 V
Sets the near end voltage for DIONIC160. (Adjustable
in 0.1 V units.)
11.0 V ... 13.6 V ... 15.0 V
Sets the near end voltage for ENDURA10. (Adjustable
in 0.1 V units.)
11.0 V ... 13.4 V ... 15.0 V
Sets the near end voltage for PAG L95. (Adjustable in
0.1 V units.)
11.0 V ... 13.6 V ... 15.0 V
Sets the full voltage for TYPE A. (Adjustable in 0.1 V
units.)
HYTRON140 NEAR
DIONIC90 NEAR
DIONIC160 NEAR
ENDURA10 NEAR
PAG L95 NEAR
TYPE A FULL
12.0 V ... 15.3 V ... 17.0 V
TYPE A NEAR
Sets the near end voltage for TYPE A. (Adjustable in
0.1 V units.)
11.0 V ... 13.6 V ... 15.0 V
TYPE A END
Sets the end voltage for TYPE A. (Adjustable in 0.1 V
units.)
11.0 V ... 13.2 V ... 15.0 V
TYPE B FULL
Sets the full voltage for TYPE B. (Adjustable in 0.1 V
units.)
12.0 V ... 15.5 V ... 17.0 V
TYPE B NEAR
Sets the near end voltage for TYPE B. (Adjustable in
0.1 V units.)
11.0 V ... 13.5 V ... 15.0 V
TYPE B END
Sets the end voltage for TYPE B. (Adjustable in 0.1 V
units.)
11.0 V ... 13.1 V ... 15.0 V
NEAR END CANCEL
Sets to cancel battery near end warning.
ON, OFF
• When set to ON, pressing the DISP/MODE CHK
button stops the flashing of WARNING and tally
lamps.
CARD FUNCTIONS Screen
Item
Setting
Notes
SCENE FILE
Reads/writes scene files from/onto the SD memory
card.
FILE SELECT: Selects scene files (1 to 4).
READ: Reads the selected scene file (1 – 4) settings
stored on the SD memory card.
WRITE: Saves the current scene file (1 – 4) settings to
the SD memory card.
TITLE RELOAD: Reloads title list.
____ indicates the factory setting
11ꢄ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Item
USER FILE
Setting
Notes
Reads/writes user files (files other than SCENE FILES)
from/onto the SD memory card.
FILE SELECT: Selects user files (1 – 4).
READ: Reads the user file (1 – 4) settings stored on
the SD memory card.
WRITE: Saves the current user file (1 – 4) settings to
the SD memory card.
TITLE RELOAD: Reloads title list.
Formats SD memory cards.
SD CARD FORMAT
3D ASSIST Screen
Item
Setting
Notes
OUTPUT SEL
Sets where to output the effect of 3D assist function
controlled by the 3D ASSIST buttons (Z WFM/ALERT/
CONV.).
LCD: The effect of the 3D assist function is output to
the LCD monitor only.
LCD/EVF: The effect of the 3D assist function is output
to the LCD monitor and viewfinder.
Selects the alert level for a short distance in the 3D
assist function.
0.5%, 1%, 1.5%, 2%, 2.5%, 3%, 3.5%, 4%
Selects the alert level for a long distance in the 3D
assist function.
NEAR LEVEL
• Use this item to set a guide for
safety shooting, preventing forward
divergence.
• Use this item to set a guide for safety
shooting, preventing backward
divergence.
FAR LEVEL
0.5%, 1%, 1.5%, 2%, 2.5%, 3%, 3.5%, 4%
DETECTION RANGE
Z WFM SCALE
Selects the detection range of the 3D assist function. • Use this item to prevent excessive
NARROW: 6.56 % (1080)
WIDE: 13.12 % (1080)
separation due to backward
divergence.
Selects the display mode of the 3D assist function.
NORMAL: Displays all the detection area.
2 x : Displays a clip in half the detection area.
OTHER FUNCTIONS Screen
Item
USER FILE
Setting
Notes
• This does not affect options in the
SCENE FILE screen.
• The TIME ZONE setting is not
initialized.
Saves user files to camera memory, loads them into
camera memory or initializes them. (For details, refer
to page 78, 107.)
LOAD, SAVE, INITIAL
ACCESS LED
Determines whether or not the P2 card access LED
should light.
ON, OFF
ALARM
Sets the alarm sound output when an alarm occurs.
HIGH, LOW, OFF
REC TALLY
Selects the recording status indicator of the camera.
RED: Red tally lamp lights.
GREEN: Green tally lamp lights.
OFF: The tally lamp does not light.
Selects whether the BAT lamp inside the viewfinder is
to light or not when the remaining battery capacity is
below NEAR END.
EVF BAT LED
ON, OFF
CLOCK SETTING
Sets the internal calendar (date)
For details, see [Setting Date and Time of Internal
Clock] (page 28).
____ indicates the factory setting
11ꢅ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Item
TIME ZONE
Setting
Sets the time difference relative to Greenwich Mean
Time (GMT).
Notes
• This setting cannot be initialized by
performing the MENU INIT option and
the INITIAL option in USER FILE.
–12:00 ... 0:00 ... +13:00
For details, see [Setting Date and Time of Internal
Clock] (page 28).
H PHASE
Adjusts the horizontal phase when phase is locked to • Hold down the JOG dial button and
the signal input to the GENLOCK IN connector.
–512 ... 0 ... +511
turn it downwards or upwards and
maintain this position to quickly
change values.
GENLOCK SEL
Selects the GENLOCK input.
GENLOCK IN: Signal input to the GENLOCK IN
connector (HD Tri-level sync)
RETURN IN: Signal input to the RETURN IN connector
(HD SDI)
MENU INIT
Restores all setting menu values including all scene
files 1 – 6 and the user file to their factory defaults.
• The TIME ZONE setting does not
return to its factory default.
DIAGNOSTIC Screen
Item
Setting
Notes
VERSION
Indicates the version of the firmware used in this
camera.
A subscreen provides details on which firmware
versions are used.
(Subscreen)
CAM SOFT: Software of the camera microprocessor
SYSCON SOFT: Software of the system control
microprocessor
P2CS BL2-1: Boot program 1 of the P2 control
microprocessor
P2CS BL2-2: Boot program 2 of the P2 control
microprocessor
P2CS KR: Kernel of the P2 control microprocessor
P2CS AP: Application software of the P2 control
microprocessor
VUP: Software of the system that totally updates the
firmware of this product
VUP FS: File system for updating this product
CAM FPGA: Configuration ROM of the camera FPGA
CAMIO FPGA: Configuration ROM of the camera IO
FPGA
AVIO FPGA: Configuration ROM of the AVIO FPGA
PQCONT FPGA: Configuration ROM of the PQ control
FPGA
MODEL NAME
SERIAL NO.
OPERATION
Indicates the model name of this camera.
Indicates serial number of this camera. (xxxxxxxxxx)
Indicates the time of the camera has been on. (xxxx h)
OPTION MENU Screen
Open this menu by holding down the DISP/MODE CHK button and when shooting status appears press the front MENU
button.
Item
AREA SELECT
Setting
Selects the TV system for the area where you use the
camera.
Notes
NTSC: Selects the NTSC area.
PAL: Selects the PAL area.
____ indicates the factory setting
1ꢀ0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Connecting to External Devices
Connecting the AJ-RC10G Remote Control Unit
Some functions can be remote controlled when the remote
control unit AJ-RC10G (optional accessory) is connected to
the camera.
When the AJ-RC10G is connected, the camera
automatically enters remote control mode after the power
switches of both the camera and the AJ-RC10G are turned
ON.
The remote control mode is released when AJ-RC10G is
removed or the power for the AJ-RC10G is turned OFF.
Switch/button operations in remote control
mode
The following switches and buttons on the camera do not
work in remote control mode.
• SHUTTER switch
• MENU button
• JOG dial button
• GAIN selector switch
• OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE selector switch
• WHITE BAL switch
• USER MAIN button
• USER 1 button
• USER 2 button
• OUTPUT CHARACTER switch
REMOTEꢁconnector
AJ-RC10G
NOTE
• Be sure to turn the POWER switches on the camera and
the AJ-RC10G off before connecting or disconnecting the
controller cable.
• Use only designated cables or designed option cables to
connect the AJ-RC10G. Use of other cables could result in
equipment damage.
Refer to the Operating Guide of the AJ-RC10G included in the
supplied CD-ROM.
For details on the current provided by the REMOTE connector,
refer to page 138.
• Data for the operations performed by the AJ-RC10G are
generally stored in the camera.
• Setting the RC-DATA-SAVE menu on the AJ-RC10G to OFF
resets the following values to the values before connecting
the AJ-RC10G.
- Synchro scan value
- Master Pedestal value
- GAIN values (R/B)
- Pedestal values (R/G/B)
- GAIN value (at LOW position)
1ꢀ1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting the AG-EC4G Extension Control Unit
Some functions can be remote controlled when the AG-
EC4G extension control unit (optional accessory) is
connected to the camera.
When the AG-EC4G is connected, the camera
automatically enters remote control mode after the power
switches of both the camera and the AG-EC4G are turned
ON.
The remote control mode is released when AG-EC4G is
removed or the power for the AG-EC4G is turned OFF.
Adjusting the Convergence Point
The convergence point can be adjusted, using the buttons
on the AG-EC4G.
c
b
a
Switch/button operations in remote control
mode
The following switches and buttons on the camera do not
work in remote control mode.
• SHUTTER switch
• MENU button
• JOG dial button
• GAIN selector switch
• OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE selector switch
• WHITE BAL switch
• USER MAIN button
• USER 1 button
• USER 2 button
a
b
c
USER buttons (USER MAIN/USER1)
RECORDER switch
tREW, yFF, gSTOP and qPLAY buttons
• OUTPUT CHARACTER switch
ꢁ
ꢁ
InꢁtheꢁSWꢁMODEꢁscreen,ꢁassignꢁRꢁCONVꢁtoꢁ
theꢁUSERꢁMAINꢁorꢁUSER1ꢁbutton.
1
PressꢁtheꢁUSERꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁwhichꢁRꢁCONVꢁhasꢁ
beenꢁassignedꢁonꢁtheꢁAG-EC4G.
2
ꢁ
ꢁ
SetꢁtheꢁRECORDERꢁswitchꢁtoꢁENABLE.
3
REMOTEꢁconnector
AG-EC4G
Adjustꢁtheꢁconvergence,ꢁusingꢁtheꢁgSTOPꢁ
andꢁqPLAYꢁbuttonsꢁforꢁcoarseꢁadjustmentꢁ
andꢁtheꢁtREWꢁandꢁyFFꢁbuttonsꢁforꢁfineꢁ
adjustment.
4
NOTE
• Be sure to turn the POWER switches on the camera and
the AG-EC4G off before connecting or disconnecting the
controller cable.
gSTOP,ꢁtREW: to adjust the convergence point
• Use only designated cables or designated option cables to
connect the AG-EC4G. Use of other cables could result in
equipment damage.
nearer
qPLAY,ꢁyFF:ꢁ to adjust the convergence point
farther
For details on the current provided by the REMOTE connector,
refer to page 138.
• Data for the operations performed by the AG-EC4G are
generally stored in the camera.
NOTE
The USER2 button on the AG-EC4G operates as the
THUMBNAIL button for the camera.
• Setting the DATA SAVE switch on the AG-EC4G to OFF resets
the following values to the values before connecting the AG-
EC4G.
- Synchro scan value
- Master Pedestal value
- GAIN values (R/B)
- Pedestal values (R/G/B)
- GAIN value (at LOW position)
1ꢀꢀ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Maintenance and Inspections
Inspections Before Shooting
Make sure you check that the system is operating normally
before embarking on a shoot. We recommend using a
colour video monitor to check the image.
Inspecting the Camera Unit
Inspection for Zoom, Iris and Gain
Preparing for Inspections
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
Setꢁtheꢁzoomꢁtoꢁelectricꢁzoomꢁmodeꢁandꢁcheckꢁ
theꢁzoomꢁoperation.
1
2
3
ꢁ
ꢁ
Mountꢁaꢁchargedꢁbattery.
1
• Check that the image changes to telephoto and
wide angle.
TurnꢁtheꢁPOWERꢁswitchꢁtoꢁONꢁtoꢁcheckꢁtheꢁ
batteryꢁremainingꢁlevelꢁonꢁtheꢁLCDꢁmonitorꢁorꢁ
inꢁtheꢁviewfinder.ꢁ
2
Setꢁtheꢁzoomꢁtoꢁmanualꢁzoomꢁmodeꢁandꢁcheckꢁ
theꢁzoomꢁoperation.
• When battery capacity is low, replace it with a fully
charged battery.
• Turn the manual zoom lever to check that the
image changes to telephoto and wide angle.
9 9 9 min B 9 0%
D I ONC 1 6 0 S C E N E 6
Setꢁtheꢁirisꢁtoꢁautomaticꢁadjustmentꢁmodeꢁandꢁ
aimꢁtheꢁlensꢁatꢁobjectsꢁwithꢁdifferentꢁdegreesꢁ
ofꢁbrightness,ꢁtoꢁcheckꢁthatꢁtheꢁautomaticꢁirisꢁ
adjustmentꢁoperatesꢁnormally.
R
I MAGE
ꢁ
Setꢁtheꢁirisꢁtoꢁmanualꢁadjustmentꢁmodeꢁandꢁ
turnꢁtheꢁirisꢁring,ꢁtoꢁcheckꢁtheꢁmanualꢁirisꢁ
adjustment.
4
5
ꢁ
3
InsertꢁPꢀꢁcardsꢁintoꢁcardꢁslotsꢁLꢁandꢁRꢁandꢁ
closeꢁtheꢁslotꢁcover.
• Confirm that both P2 card access LEDs L and R
light in orange.
• Recording cannot start if either P2 card has no
free space for recording or is write-protected.
ꢁ
Returnꢁtheꢁirisꢁtoꢁautomaticꢁadjustmentꢁmodeꢁ
andꢁchangeꢁtheꢁGAINꢁswitchꢁsettingꢁtoꢁL,ꢁM,ꢁ
andꢁH,ꢁtoꢁcheckꢁtheꢁfollowingꢁitems:
• The iris is adjusted for objects with the same
brightness according to the switch setting.
• The gain value displayed on the viewfinder screen
changes according to the switch setting.
PꢀꢁcardꢁaccessꢁLEDs
Inspection for 3D Recording
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
PressꢁtheꢁLCD/EVFꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁsetꢁtheꢁLCD/EVFꢁ
modeꢁtoꢁMIXꢁorꢁSIDEꢁbyꢁSIDE.
1
2
3
PressꢁtheꢁSHIFTꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁdisplayꢁtheꢁ3DꢁFINEꢁ
adjustmentꢁscreen.
Checkꢁtheꢁverticalꢁposition,ꢁfocus,ꢁandꢁlensꢁirisꢁ
ofꢁtheꢁleft-lensꢁimageꢁandꢁright-lensꢁimage,ꢁonꢁ
theꢁLCDꢁmonitorꢁandꢁinꢁtheꢁviewfinder.
• If the adjustments are not the same for the left-lens
image and the right-lens image, readjust them
using the 3D FINE function.
For details, refer to [Adjustment between Two
Lenses (3D FINE function)] (page 57).
1ꢀ3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Inspecting the Audio Level Automatic
Adjustment
Inspecting the Memory Recording
Functions
Make sure you successively carry out the inspections from
[Inspecting the P2 Card Recording] to [Inspecting the
Earphone and Speaker].
ꢁ
1
SetꢁtheꢁAUDIOꢁSELECTꢁCH1ꢁandꢁCHꢀꢁ
switchesꢁtoꢁAUTO.
Inspecting the P2 Card Recording
ꢁ
SetꢁtheꢁAUDIOꢁINꢁswitchꢁtoꢁFRONT.
2
3
ꢁ
CheckꢁonꢁtheꢁLCDꢁmonitorꢁorꢁinꢁtheꢁviewfinderꢁ
thatꢁtheꢁremainingꢁPꢀꢁcardꢁrecordingꢁcapacityꢁ
forꢁbothꢁPꢀꢁcardsꢁisꢁsufficient.
1
2
ꢁ
AimꢁtheꢁmicrophoneꢁconnectedꢁtoꢁtheꢁMICꢁjackꢁ
atꢁanꢁappropriateꢁsoundꢁsource.ꢁThen,ꢁcheckꢁ
thatꢁtheꢁlevelꢁdisplaysꢁforꢁbothꢁCH1ꢁandꢁCHꢀꢁ
changeꢁaccordingꢁtoꢁtheꢁsoundꢁlevel.
For details, refer to [Screen Displays] (page 68).
ꢁ
Pressꢁtheꢁcamera’sꢁRECꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁcheckꢁtheꢁ
followingꢁitems:
Inspecting the Audio Level Manual
Adjustment
• The P2 card access LEDs blink in orange.
• The REC indication on the screen lights.
• System warnings do not appear on the screen.
ꢁ
SetꢁtheꢁAUDIOꢁINꢁswitchꢁtoꢁFRONT.
1
2
ꢁ
3
Pressꢁtheꢁcamera’sꢁRECꢁbuttonꢁagain.
ꢁ
SetꢁtheꢁAUDIOꢁSELECTꢁCH1ꢁandꢁCHꢀꢁ
switchesꢁtoꢁMAN.
• Check that the P2 card access LEDs light in
orange, and that the REC indication on the screen
is cleared.
ꢁ
3
TurnꢁtheꢁAUDIOꢁLEVELꢁCH1ꢁandꢁCHꢀꢁcontrols.
• Check that the level display increases when the
controls are turned to the right.
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
UsingꢁtheꢁRECꢁbuttonꢁonꢁtheꢁhandle,ꢁrepeatꢁ
Stepsꢁꢀꢁtoꢁ3ꢁtoꢁcheckꢁtheꢁsameꢁoperation.
4
5
6
Inspecting the Earphone and Speaker
UsingꢁtheꢁRECꢁbuttonꢁonꢁtheꢁlensꢁunit,ꢁrepeatꢁ
Stepsꢁꢀꢁtoꢁ3ꢁtoꢁcheckꢁtheꢁsameꢁoperation.
ꢁ
TurnꢁtheꢁMONITORꢁcontrolꢁtoꢁcheckꢁthatꢁtheꢁ
speakerꢁvolumeꢁchanges.
1
2
PressꢁtheꢁTHUMBNAILꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁswitchꢁ
theꢁthumbnailꢁscreenꢁtoꢁplayꢁbackꢁcurrentlyꢁ
recordedꢁclipꢁfromꢁthumbnail.ꢁ
ꢁ
ConnectꢁanꢁearphoneꢁtoꢁtheꢁPHONESꢁjack.
• Check that the speaker is turned off and the
microphone sound can be heard from the
earphone.
• Check that playback is operating normally.
ꢁ
3
TurnꢁtheꢁMONITORꢁcontrolꢁtoꢁcheckꢁthatꢁtheꢁ
earphoneꢁvolumeꢁchanges.
1ꢀ4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Inspection for Using an External
Microphone
Inspection of the clock, time code, and
user bits
ꢁ
ConnectꢁanꢁexternalꢁmicrophoneꢁtoꢁtheꢁAUDIOꢁ
INꢁCH1/CHꢀꢁconnectors.
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
Setꢁtheꢁuserꢁbitsꢁasꢁrequired.
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Please refer to [Setting User Bits] (page 61) for the
setting procedures.
ꢁ
SetꢁtheꢁAUDIOꢁINꢁswitchꢁtoꢁREAR.
2
3
Setꢁtheꢁtimeꢁcode.
Please refer to [Setting the Time Code] (page 63) for
the setting procedures.
ꢁ
SetꢁtheꢁLINE/MICꢁselectorꢁswitchesꢁonꢁtheꢁrearꢁ
panelꢁtoꢁMIC,ꢁandꢁsetꢁtheꢁ+4ꢄVꢁON/OFFꢁswitchꢁ
dependingꢁonꢁtheꢁpowerꢁsupplyꢁtypeꢁofꢁtheꢁ
externalꢁmicrophone.
SetꢁtheꢁTCGꢁswitchꢁtoꢁR-RUN.
• Press the COUNTER button to display the time
code on the LCD monitor or in the viewfinder.
• OFF: For a microphone with internal power supply.
• +48V: For a microphone with external power
supply.
PressꢁtheꢁRECꢁbutton.
• Check that the counter display number changes
as recording progresses.
ꢁ
4
Aimꢁtheꢁmicrophoneꢁatꢁtheꢁsoundꢁsourceꢁandꢁ
checkꢁthatꢁtheꢁsoundꢁlevelꢁindicationꢁonꢁtheꢁ
LCDꢁmonitorꢁorꢁinꢁtheꢁviewfinderꢁvariesꢁwithꢁ
changesꢁinꢁsoundꢁintensity.
PressꢁtheꢁRECꢁbuttonꢁagain.
• Check that recording stops and the counter
display number stops changing.
• The channels can also be checked separately by
connecting a single microphone to each channel.
SetꢁtheꢁTCGꢁswitchꢁtoꢁF-RUN.
• Check that the counter display number changes
regardless of recording status.
HoldꢁdownꢁtheꢁDISP/MODEꢁCHKꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁ
checkꢁtheꢁdateꢁandꢁtimeꢁonꢁtheꢁLCDꢁmonitorꢁorꢁ
inꢁtheꢁviewfinder.ꢁ
• Adjust the date and time setting if the DATE, TIME
and time zone is not correctly displayed.
For details, see [Setting Date and Time of Internal
Clock] (page 28).
NOTE
Note that date and time data set for DATE,TIME, and
time zone is recorded in clips, and affects the playback
sequence, etc. at the time of thumbnail manipulations.
1ꢀ5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance
Cleaning Inside the Viewfinder
• Do not use solvent such as thinner to remove dirt.
• To clean the lens, use a commercially available lens
cleaner.
• Never wipe the mirror. If dust adheres on the mirror, use a
commercially available blower brush.
NOTE
When outdoors, never carry or set up the camera with the
eyepiece facing up to prevent sunlight, which could damage
the camera, from entering.
Charging the Internal Battery
The internal battery preserves the date and time settings.
If the camera is left unused for half a year or longer, the
internal battery may become depleted and the
(battery
icon) may appear on the LCD monitor and in the viewfinder.
Should this happen, connect an external DC power supply
or battery, and leave the camera turned off for about four
hours to fully charge the internal battery. Then reset the
time and date.
Replace the internal battery if
Consult your distributor.
appears after charging.
1ꢀꢂ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Warning System
Warning Description Tables
If a problem is detected immediately after the power is turned on, or during operation, this will be indicated by the
WARNING lamp, lamps on the LCD monitor and a warning tone.
Warnings have priorities. If multiple errors occur simultaneously, the WARNING lamp, warning display on the screen, and
alarm tone are displayed in order of priority shown in the table below.
Warning description
and recording/playback Countermeasures
Warning
type
WARNING Alarm
Priority
LCD indication
Tally lamp
1
lamp
tone
*
operation
Check the cause
Blinks 4
times per
second
Blinks 4
times per
second
Reference signal or
2
indication
*
SYSTEM ERROR cause
Continuous
tone
1
System error
communication error.
and consult your
Operation stops.
distributor.
indication 2 blinks red.
*
A P2 card was removed
during access and card data Turn off the power.
Incorrect
P2 card
removal
Blinks 4
times per
second
Blinks 4
times per
second
TURN POWER OFF
Blinks red
Continuous was corrupted.
Repair the P2 card if
the clips on the card
are corrupted.
2
3
tone
Both P2 card access LEDs
blink in orange. Recording/
playback cannot start.
LOW BATTERY blinks
red, and the battery level
bar blinks with the empty
status. (This indication
The battery is exhausted.
Recording and playback
stop. The camera stops
automatically when the
voltage drops.
The
battery is
Blinks 1 time
per second
Continuous
tone
Lights
Replace the battery.
exhauseted appears even if CARD/
BATT is set to OFF in the
DISPLAY SETUP screen.)
Version misatch has occurred.
VERSION MISMATCH
Version
Blinks 4
times per
second
Blinks 4
times per
second
Only SD CARD FORMAT and Perform CARD
UPDATE are available with the UPDATE.
thumbnail menu.
4
5
PLEASE UPDATE
mismatch
No
No
Blinks white
High temperature error
High
Stop operation
is detected. Operation
immediately
Temperature HIGH TEMPERATURE
Off
Off
Off
Off
continues, but abnormal
and consult your
recording/playback may
distributor.
error
Blinks red
detectionl
occur.
The fan is in failure and has
stopped. Although operation
continues with the fan
stopped, it may raise the
temperature inside the unit,
causing abnormal recording/
Check the cause
FAN STOPPED cause
indication 3 and
*
6
Fan stop
No
indication 3 blinks red
consult your
*
distributor.
playback.
(Continued on the next page)
1 When the alarm sounds, audio is not output to the camera speakers or earphones. The DISP/MODE CHK button
cancels only the alarm tone when pressed during an alarm.
*
2 P2 SYSTEM ERROR cause indication
*
• P2 MICON ERROR: The P2 microprocessor does not respond.
• P2 CONTROL ERROR: A P2 recording control error has occurred.
• CAM MICON ERROR: The camera microprocessor does not respond.
• P2 MICON LINK ERROR: A connection error between P2 microprocessors has occurred.
3 FAN STOPPED cause indication
*
• FAN: FAN error position (1, 1/2, 1/3, 2, 2/3, 3, 1/2/3)
1ꢀꢃ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Warning description
and recording/playback Countermeasures
operation
Warning
type
WARNING Alarm
Priority
LCD indication
Tally lamp
lamp
tone
An error in the camera section Check the cause
Error of
camera
section
WARNING cause
is detected. Operation
continues, but abnormal
shooting may occur.
indication 4 and
*
7
Off
Off
No
indication 4 blinks red
consult your
distributor.
*
Blinks 4
times per
second after completing
completion recording
of recording.
Continuous
tone after
completing
recording
Lights after
No more space on P2
Delete clips that are
no longer needed or
insert a new card.
P2
P2 card fully
recorded
FULL
8
9
cards left for recording.Stop
Blinks red
5
recording.
*
Check the number
and type of the
The synchronization of clip
position has failed. It may
occur when the reference
signal is unstable during 3D
clip playback
clip. Or press the
STOP button to stop
playback, check the
connection and/or
the input signal, then
restart playback.
Turn the power off
and then back on
again and check
recording and
Playback
sync error
SYNC POSI FAILED
Blinks white
Off
Off
No
Intermittent
tone 4
times per
second
REC WARNING
Blinks 4
times per
second
Blinks 4
times per
second
A recording error has
Recording
error
6
Cause indication
*
10
occurred. The error may
playback. Replace
any P2 card that
does not enable
normal recording.
7
*
Blinks red
terminate recording.
(Continued on the next page)
4 Camera WARINNG cause indication
*
• FOCUS NG
• ZOOM NG
• IRIS NG : Iris error (
• ND FILTER NG : ND filter error (
• CONV. NG : Convergence error (
• SUB LENS NG : Sub-lens error (
: Focus error (
: Zoom error (
: L, R or L/R)
: L, R or L/R)
: L, R or L/R)
: L, R or L/R)
: L, R or L/R)
: L, R or L/R)
5 Perform either of the following procedures to cancel this warning.
• Press a playback control button.
*
• Press the THUMBNAIL button.
• Remove the P2 card and insert another card.
6 REC WARNING cause indication
• CARD ERROR: P2CARD error ( indicates the slot of the card with the error.) Stops recording.
*
• REC RAM OVERFLOW: Overflow of recording RAM. Stops recording.
• PULL DOWN ERROR: 24P, 30P (25P) video pulldown error. Recording continues.
• OVER MAX# CLIPS: Recording is interrupted as the limit for the number of clips that can be recorded to one P2 card
has been reached.
• IRREGULAR FRM SIG: The reference signal, such as the GENLOCK input, is distorted.
• L/R DURATION NG: The duration of the recorded clip is different between the L and R P2 cards.
7 Perform either of the following procedures to cancel this warning.
• Press the REC button.
*
• Press a playback control button.
• Press the THUMBNAIL button.
• Remove all cards.
1ꢀꢄ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Warning description
and recording/playback Countermeasures
operation
Warning
type
WARNING Alarm
Priority
LCD indication
Tally lamp
lamp
tone
Drop in
Blinks 4
times per
second
(Recording second
only)
Indicates poor reception
Check microphone
from the wireless receiver.
power supply and
Recording continues but
receiver reception
wireless microphone cannot
status.
reception
quality of
wireless
receiver
transmission
Blinks 4
times per
8
*
WIRELESS RF
Blinks red
11
No
be received.
The last bar in the battery
level indication blinks (This
Battery
indication appears even if Blinks 1 time Blinks 1 time
The battery is near depletion. Replace the battery
12
No
No
9
nearly empty CARD/BATT is set to OFF
in the DISPLAY SETUP
screen.)
per second per second
Operation continues.
as necessary.
*
Less than 2 minutes is left on
the P2 cards (level indicator
shows 1 minute or less). This
warning appears only during
recording.
Blinks 1 time Blinks 1 time
The P2 card level indicator per second per second
P2 card
13 nearly fully
recorded
Replace the P2
cards as necessary.
blinks.
during
during
recording.
recording.
8 The warning can be disabled by setting the WIRELESS WARN option on the AUDIO SETUP screen to OFF.
9 When NEAR END CANCEL is set to ON, you can press the DISP/MODE CHK button to cancel the alarm.
*
*
1ꢀꢅ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Warning and Error Display for Thumbnail Operation
Item
Message
Description
Data cannot be accessed because it is
corrupted or for other reasons.
P2 card contains contents version
mismatches or bad clips.
Formatting cannot be made due to some P2
card problem.
Data cannot be repaired since content that
cannot be repaired is selected.
Some of the selected clip could not be
repaired.
Measure
Restore media and clips to normal state
before access.
Match devices and contents versions, and
repair bad clips.
CANNOT ACCESS!
CANNOT DELETE !
CANNOT FORMAT!
CANNOT REPAIR!
Check the P2 card.
Check selected content.
—
CANNOT REPAIR IN
SELECTION!
CARD FULL!
INVALID VALUE!
The P2 or SD card is full.
Entered data was invalid.
Insert media with sufficient capacity.
Enter data in a valid range.
Insert a card with sufficient recording
capacity.
The recording capacity on the P2 card is
insufficient.
You tried to add a shot mark to a clip that had
been recorded across multiple cards, using
another 3D device.
LACK OF CAPACITY!
MISSING CLIP!
Any clip recorded across multiple cards is
not supported.
Thumbnails NO CARD!
NO FILE!
No P2 or SD card is inserted.
The designated file is not found.
No SD card is inserted.
Insert compatible media.
Check the file.
Insert an SD card.
Reduce the number of selected clips.
• Match devices and contents versions.
• If corrupted clips exist (including
corrupted clips that are located on the
copy destination), repair the corrupted
clips or delete them.
NO SD CARD!
TOO MANY CLIPS!
Too many clips are selected.
UNKNOWN
P2 card contains contents version
CONTENTS FORMAT! mismatches or corrupted content.
Use UTF-8 for the metadata character
code. Use the viewer to enter correct
characters.
UNKNOWN DATA!
The metadata character code is invalid.
The user clip name plus the counter
value can only contain up to 100
bytes. Characters in the clip name are
automatically deleted when the total
exceeds 100 bytes.
USER CLIP NAME
MODIFIED!
Characters in the clip name had to be
deleted in adding the counter value.
WRITE PROTECTED!
CANNOT SET! INVALID
keyboard VALUE!
The P2 or SD card is write protected.
The entered value is incorrect.
Insert write-enabled media.
Soft
Change the value.
130
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Updating the Firmware Incorporated into the Unit
Check firmware version of the camera in the DIAGNOSTIC
screen. Then access the site listed in the NOTE below to
check the most recent firmware information and download
any firmware you require.
NOTE
• The update is completed by loading the downloaded file onto
the unit via an SD memory card. For details on updating, visit
the support desk at the following website.
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/
• Be sure to use a compatible SD memory card.The unit is
compatible with SD memory cards based on the SD and
SDHC standards. Also, be sure to format the memory card
using the unit before use.
131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10 Index
Dimensions...................................................... 135
MENU DIONIC160 NEAR ........................................... 118
MENU DIONIC90 NEAR ............................................. 118
MENU DISPLAY SETUP screen .................................. 116
2
2D LL recording ............................................... 35
3
MENU 3D ASSIST screen ........................................... 119
3D FINE function ............................................... 57
3D assist function.............................................. 56
3D recording...................................................... 53
Adjustment................................................... 54
Setting.......................................................... 53
3D recording mode ........................................... 53
E
Electronic Shutter .............................................. 48
MENU ENDURA10 NEAR ........................................... 118
MENU EVF BAT LED................................................... 119
MENU EVF PEAK FREQ.............................................. 116
MENU EVF PEAK LEVEL ............................................ 116
Errors .......................................................... 70,130
MENU EXT DC IN SEL................................................ 117
External DC power ............................................ 85
External power................................................... 85
A
MENU A.IRIS LEVEL. ................................................ 111
ABB ................................................................... 47
Audio devices.................................................... 88
MENU ACCESS LED................................................... 119
MENU ALARM ............................................................ 119
MENU AREA SELECT................................................. 120
Audio Input........................................................ 51
MENU AUDIO SETUP screen ..................................... 114
Auto Black Balance........................................... 47
MENU AUTO LEVEL CH3........................................... 115
MENU AUTO LEVEL CH4........................................... 115
F
F.AUDIO LEVEL control ..................................... 52
MENU F.MIC LEVEL.................................................... 115
MENU F.MIC POWER.................................................. 115
MENU FAR LEVEL ...................................................... 119
Fast-forward playback....................................... 42
Fast-reverse playback....................................... 42
MENU FILE SELECT ................................................... 110
Firmware.......................................................... 131
Focus assist....................................................... 75
MENU FOCUS BAR .................................................... 117
Formatting
B
MENU BATTERY MODE.............................................. 118
MENU BATTERY SELECT ........................................... 118
MENU BATTERY SETUP screen ................................. 117
Battery
P2 Card...................................................... 100
SD memory card.................................. 79, 100
MENU FRAME RATE................................................... 110
Front microphone .............................................. 87
MENU FRONT VR CH1............................................... 114
MENU FRONT VR CH2............................................... 114
Mounting...................................................... 84
Setting.......................................................... 84
Black Balance ................................................... 47
G
C
MENU GAMMA........................................................... 111
MENU CARD FUNCTION screen................................ 118
MENU CARD/BATT ..................................................... 117
Center marker.................................................... 74
MENU CHROMA LEVEL ............................................. 110
MENU CHROMA PHASE ............................................ 110
Cine-like gamma ............................................... 38
Clip .................................................................... 91
MENU CLOCK SETTING ............................................ 119
MENU COLOR TEMP Ach .......................................... 110
MENU COLOR TEMP Bch .......................................... 110
MENU CONVERGENCE.............................................. 117
Convergence point...................................... 54, 55
Connector signal ............................................. 138
Counter.............................................................. 66
Cue up............................................................... 42
MENU GENLOCK SEL................................................ 120
H
MENU H PHASE ......................................................... 120
MENU HEADROOM.................................................... 115
MENU HIGH GAIN...................................................... 113
MENU HYTRON140 NEAR ......................................... 118
I
Inspection........................................................ 123
Internal battery ................................................ 126
Internal Clock .................................................... 28
Interval recording .............................................. 40
MENU INTERVAL TIME............................................... 113
D
K
Date and Time................................................... 28
MENU DATE/TIME....................................................... 117
DC power .......................................................... 85
MENU KNEE ............................................................... 111
MENU DETAIL CORING.............................................. 110
MENU DETAIL LEVEL ................................................. 110
MENU DETECTION RANGE ....................................... 119
MENU DIAGNOSTIC screen....................................... 120
13ꢀ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L
P
LCD ................................................................. 106
P2 Cards
Formatting.................................................. 100
MENU LCD BACKLIGHT ............................................ 116
LCD monitor ...................................................... 76
Inserting....................................................... 30
Prevent Accidental Erasure ......................... 31
Recording times........................................... 32
Removing..................................................... 30
Status........................................................... 31
Status Display.............................................. 73
MENU LCD SETTING.................................................. 116
MENU LCD/EVF.......................................................... 113
MENU LEVEL METER ................................................. 117
MENU LIMITER CH1................................................... 114
MENU LIMITER CH2................................................... 114
MENU LOAD/SAVE/INIT.............................................. 110
Log data .......................................................... 105
MENU PAG L95 NEAR................................................ 118
Playback............................................................ 42
Playing back clips ............................................. 94
Power supply..................................................... 84
Properties ........................................................ 102
MENU LOW GAIN....................................................... 113
M
MENU MAIN MENU .................................................... 108
MENU MARKER.......................................................... 117
MENU MASTER PED .................................................. 111
MENU MATRIX............................................................ 111
MENU MENU INIT....................................................... 120
Menu
R
MENU R.LINE LEVEL.................................................. 115
MENU R.MIC CH1 LEVEL........................................... 115
MENU R.MIC CH2 LEVEL........................................... 115
MENU R.MIC POWER................................................. 115
MENU REC COUNTER ............................................... 117
MENU REC FORMAT .................................................. 112
MENU REC FUNCTION .............................................. 113
REC CHECK function ........................................ 41
MENU REC MODE...................................................... 112
MENU REC TALLY....................................................... 119
Recording formats............................................. 43
Recording functions .......................................... 43
Recording level.................................................. 51
Recording signal ............................................... 43
MENU RECORDING SETUP screen ........................... 113
Remote control ................................................ 121
Restoring ........................................................... 96
MENU RET.................................................................. 113
Menus ........................................................ 106
Thumbnail screen ........................................ 91
Initializing................................................... 107
Using.......................................................... 106
Meta Data.......................................................... 97
MENU MIC LOWCUT CH1.......................................... 114
MENU MIC LOWCUT CH2.......................................... 114
MENU MIC LOWCUT CH3.......................................... 114
MENU MIC LOWCUT CH4.......................................... 114
Microphone........................................................ 87
MENU MID GAIN ........................................................ 113
MODE CHECK................................................... 73
MENU MODEL NAME................................................. 120
MENU MON OUT SEL ................................................ 116
MENU MONITOR SELECT.......................................... 115
S
N
Safety zone markers.......................................... 74
MENU SAFETY ZONE................................................. 117
Scene File.......................................................... 80
MENU SCENE FILE..................................................... 118
Scene File Data ................................................. 80
MENU SCENE FILE screen......................................... 110
MENU SD CARD FORMAT.......................................... 119
SD memory cards
MENU NAME EDIT...................................................... 111
Native recording................................................ 36
Native VFR Recording ....................................... 37
MENU NEAR LEVEL ................................................... 119
MENU NEAR END CANCEL ....................................... 118
Normal Recording ............................................. 34
Normal speed playback.................................... 42
Format.................................................. 79, 100
Formatting, Writing and Reading................. 79
Handling ...................................................... 79
Insert............................................................ 79
Remove........................................................ 79
Status Display............................................ 104
MENU SERIAL NO...................................................... 120
Shooting ............................................................ 34
Shot Marker (SHOT MARK)............................... 41
Shoulder Strap................................................... 89
Shutter Mode..................................................... 48
Shutter Speed.................................................... 48
Specifications.................................................. 135
MENU SW MODE screen............................................ 113
MENU SYNC SCAN DISP ........................................... 117
SYNCHRO SCAN............................................... 49
O
MENU OPERATION..................................................... 120
MENU OPTION MENU screen.................................... 120
MENU OTHER DISPLAY ............................................. 117
MENU OTHER FUNCTIONS screen ........................... 119
Output format .................................................... 45
MENU OUTPUT SEL................................................... 119
MENU OUTPUT SEL screen ....................................... 116
Overcranking effects ......................................... 39
133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MENU SYNCHRO SCAN............................................. 110
MENU SYSTEM MODE ............................................... 111
MENU SYSTEM SETUP screen................................... 111
MENU ZEBRA1 DETECT ............................................ 117
MENU ZEBRA2........................................................... 117
MENU ZEBRA2 DETECT ............................................ 117
MENU ZOOM & FOCUS ............................................. 117
T
MENU TC MODE ........................................................ 114
MENU TC OUT............................................................ 116
MENU TEST TONE...................................................... 115
THUMBNAIL...................................................... 91
Thumbnail
Screen.......................................................... 91
Selecting...................................................... 93
Switching ..................................................... 94
Time Code......................................................... 63
Time Data .......................................................... 59
Time zone.......................................................... 28
MENU TIME ZONE...................................................... 120
Tripod................................................................. 89
MENU TYPE A END .................................................... 118
MENU TYPE A FULL................................................... 118
MENU TYPE A NEAR.................................................. 118
MENU TYPE B END .................................................... 118
MENU TYPE B FULL................................................... 118
MENU TYPE B NEAR.................................................. 118
U
MENU UB MODE........................................................ 114
Undercranking effects....................................... 39
Updating.......................................................... 131
User bits ............................................................ 59
USER buttons .................................................... 50
USER CLIP NAME ............................................. 99
MENU USER FILE....................................................... 119
MENU USER MAIN ..................................................... 113
MENU USER1 ............................................................. 113
MENU USER2 ............................................................. 113
V
MENU V DETAIL LEVEL.............................................. 110
Variable Frame Rate (VFR)................................ 37
Variable Speed Playback .................................. 42
MENU VERSION ......................................................... 120
MENU VFR.................................................................. 110
Viewfinder
Screen displays ........................................... 68
Status Displays ............................................ 67
W
Warning System............................................... 127
Warnings............................................................ 70
Waveform monitor.............................................. 75
White Balance ................................................... 46
Wireless receiver ............................................... 88
MENU WIRELESS TYPE.............................................. 115
MENU WIRELESS WARN............................................ 115
Z
MENU Z WFM SCALE................................................. 119
Zebra pattern..................................................... 74
134
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11 Specifications
Dimensions and specifications
Dimensions
3
4
654.5 mm (25- / inches)
5
8
270.5 mm (10- / inches)
3
16
335 mm (13- / inches)
125 mm
15
16
149mm
(4- / inches)
7
8
(5- / inches)
92 mm
5
8
(3- / inches)
1
4
667.5 mm (26- / inches)
137 mm
3
8
(5- / inches)
235 mm
1
4
(9- / inches)
196 mm
11
16
(7- / inches)
93.5 mm
11
16
(3- / inches)
Specifications
General
Power supply:
DC 12 V (11 V to 17 V)
38 W (Camera only)
Power consumption:
indicates safety information.
Ambient operating
temperature/humidity:
0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F) / 10 % to 80 % (relative humidity)
Storage temperature:
–20 °C to 60 °C (–4 °F to 140 °F)
Approx. 6.1 kg (13.4 lb) (camera unit only)
Approx 7.9 kg (17.4 lb) (including an AJ-HVF21KG, a DIONIC battery, two P2 cards, and an
AJ-MC900G microphone)
Weight:
Dimensions:
(Camera only)
235 mm (width) × 270.5 mm (height) × 667.5 mm (depth) (excluding protrusions)
9-1/4 inches (width) × 10-5/8 inches (height) × 26-1/4 inches (depth) (excluding protrusions)
135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Camera Unit
Pickup devices:
Lens:
1/3-type progressive, 2.2-megapixel, 3MOS sensor × 2
Optical 17.0x, F1.6 (Wide) to F3.4 (Tele)
Focus distance: f 4.6 mm to 79 mm (35 mm equivalent: 35.0 mm to 601.9 mm)
Color separation optical
system:
Prism system
Distance betweent he
optical axes:
Approx. 58 mm (2-5/16 inches)
Reference plane
adjustment range:
ND filter:
Approx. 1.1 m (43-5/16 inches) to ∞
4 positions (CLEAR, 1/4ND, 1/16ND, 1/64ND)
0, +3, +6, +9, +12 dB
Gain settings:
Shutter speed:
• 60i/60p mode: 1/60 (OFF), 1/100, 1/120, 1/250 sec.
• 30p mode: 1/30 (OFF), 1/60, 1/100, 1/120, 1/250 sec.
• 24p mode: 1/24 (OFF), 1/60, 1/100, 1/120, 1/250 sec.
• 50i/50p mode: 1/50 (OFF), 1/60, 1/120, 1/250 sec.
• 25p mode: 1/25 (OFF), 1/50, 1/60, 1/120, 1/250 sec.
• 60i/60p mode: 1/60.0 to 1/249.8
Shutter speed
(Synchro scan):
• 30p mode: 1/30.0 to 1/249.8
• 24p mode: 1/24.0 to 1/249.8
• 50i/50p mode: 1/50.0 to 1/250.0
• 25p mode: 1/25.0 to 1/250.0
Shutter speed
(slow):
• 60i/60p mode: 1/15, 1/30
• 30p mode: 1/15
• 24p mode: 1/12
• 50i/50p mode: 1/12.5, 1/25
• 25p mode: 1/12.5
Frame rates:
• 59.94 Hz mode:
variable 12/15/18/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/30/32/34/36/40/44/48/54/60 fps (frames per second)
• 50 Hz mode:
variable 12/15/18/20/21/22/23/24/25/26/27/28/30/32/34/37/42/45/48/50 fps (frames per second)
Memory card recorder Unit
Recording media:
P2 card
Recording Formats:
AVC-Intra 100/AVC-Intra 50
Recording/Playback Time: AVC-Intra 100:
64 GB: approx. 60 min., with two P2 cards (L/R)
AVC-Intra 50:
64 GB: approx. 120 min., with two P2 cards (L/R)
The times listed above can be continuously recorded as one clip. The number of recording
clips will reduce the above figures somewhat.
• 59.94 Hz mode
Recorded video signals:
1080/59.94i, 1080/29.97pN, 1080/23.98pN, 720/59.94p, 720/29.97pN, 720/23.98pN
• 50 Hz mode
1080/50i, 1080/25pN, 720/50p, 720/25pN
Digital video Unit
Sampling Frequency:
AVC-Intra 100:
Y: 74.1758 MHz, PB/PR: 37.0879 MHz
AVC-Intra 50:
Y: 13.5 MHz, PB/PR: 6.75 MHz
10 bit
Quantizing:
Video Compression Format:
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 Intra Profile
13ꢂ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Digital audio Unit
Audio Recording Signal:
Head room:
48 kHz/16 bit, 4CH
20 dB/18 dB Menu selectable
Video Input/Output Unit
GENLOCK IN:
HD SDI OUT:
HD SDI MONITOR OUT:
HDMI OUT:
BNC × 1, 1.0 V [p-p], 75 Ω
BNC × 2 (L/R), 0.8 V [p-p], 75 Ω
BNC × 1, 0.8 V [p-p], 75 Ω
A type × 1
• Simultaneous output with HD SDI OUT is not possible.
HD SDI RETURN IN:
BNC × 1, 0.8V [p-p], 75 Ω
Audio Input/Output Unit
MIC IN:
XLR, 5-pin
+48 V (available)
available menu selections: –40 dBu/–50 dBu
AUDIO IN:
XLR × 2, 3-pin (CH1, CH2)
LINE/MIC/+48 V (selectable)
LINE: available menu selections: +4 dBu/0 dBu/–3 dBu
MIC: available menu selections: –50 dBu/–60 dBu
25-pin, D-SUB, –40 dBu
WIRELESS:
Earphone:
ø3.5 mm stereo mini jack × 2
Internal speaker:
28 mm diameter × 1
Other Input/Output Unit
TC IN:
BNC × 1, 0.5 V [p-p] to 8 V [p-p], 10 kΩ
TC OUT:
DC IN:
DC OUT:
REMOTE:
CAMERA REMOTE:
BNC × 1, low impedance, 2.0 V 0.5 V [p-p]
XLR × 1, 4 pins, DC 12 V (DC 11.0 V to 17.0 V)
4 pins, DC 12 V (DC 11.0 V to 17.0 V), Maximum rated current: 1.5 A
10 pins
ZOOM S/S: Super mini jack (2.5 mm diameter) × 1
FOCUS IRIS: Super mini jack (3.5 mm diameter) × 1
CONVERGENCE: Super mini jack (2.5 mm diameter) × 1
LCD Monitor Unit
LCD monitor:
82 mm (3.2 inch) color LCD monitor with approx. 921,000 dots (16:9)
13ꢃ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connector Signal Description
DC IN
REMOTE
1
2
3
4
GND
NC
NC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CAM DATA (H)
CAM DATA (C)
CAM CONT (H)
CAM CONT (C)
R/C ON
R/C VIDEO OUT
R/C VIDEO GND
NC
+12 V
Panasonic Part No. K1AA104H0038
Manufacturer Part No. HA16RX-4P (SW1) (76)
(Hirose Electric Co.)
9
10
UNREG +12 V (Max 0.6 A)
GND
Panasonic Part No. K1AY110JA001
Manufacturer Part No. HR10A-10R-10SC (71)
(Hirose Electric Co.)
4
1
2
3
8
1
7
6
2
3
10
9
NOTE
Be sure to use correct polarity when using external power
supplies.
4
5
FRONT MIC IN
1
2
3
4
5
GND
DC OUT
L CH IN (H)
L CH IN (C)
R CH IN (H)
R CH IN (C)
1
2
3
4
GND
R TALLY (open collector)
REC SW
UNREG +12 V (Max 1.5 A)
Panasonic Part No. K1AB105B0002
Manufacturer Part No. NC5FBH (NEUTRIK)
Panasonic Part No. K1AY104J0001
Manufacturer Part No. HR10A-7R-4SC (73)
(Hirose Electric Co.)
1
2
4
3
AUDIO IN CH1, CH2
1
2
3
GND
AUDIO IN (H)
AUDIO IN (C)
Panasonic Part No. K1AY103A0001
Manufacturer Part No. HA16PRM-3SG (72)
(Hirose Electric Co.)
PUSH
2
1
3
13ꢄ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wireless receiver interface
1
2
CH-1 SHIELD
CH-1 HOT
GND
Audio input from a wireless
receiver: CH1 HOT
3
CH-1 COLD
Audio input from a wireless
receiver: CH1 COLD
4
5
GND
UNREG +12 V
GND
Power supply for a wireless
receiver
6
7
RX ON
Remote power output to a wireless
receiver
RF warning input from a wireless
receiver
RF WARN
8
9
10
11
12
13
RM5
RM4
SPARE 1
SPARE 2
EXT CLK
CLK SHIELD
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
GND
14 CH-2 SHIELD
15
16
17
CH-2 HOT
CH-2 COLD
+5.6 V
Audio input from a wireless
receiver: CH2 HOT
Audio input from a wireless
receiver: CH2 COLD
Power supply for a wireless
receiver
18
19
20
VIDEO OUT
VIDEO RET
VIDEO EN
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
21 RM1 (RM CLK)
22 RM2 (RM DATA)
23 RM3 (RM WR)
24
25
RM +5 V
RM GND
Panasonic Parts No. K1GB25A00010
Manufacturer Parts No. HDBB-25S (05)
(Hirose Electric Co.)
13
25
1
14
13ꢅ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dear customer,
DateꢁofꢁPurchaseꢁ
DealerꢁPurchasedꢁFromꢁ
DealerꢁAddressꢁ
DealerꢁPhoneꢁNo.ꢁ
ModelꢁNo.ꢁ
Thank you for choosing Panasonic!
Pleaseꢁtakeꢁtimeꢁtoꢁfillꢁinꢁtheꢁinformationꢁonꢁtheꢁright.ꢁBeꢁ
sureꢁtoꢁretain this manualꢁasꢁyourꢁconvenientꢁcameraꢁ
informationꢁsource.
SerialꢁNo.ꢁ
Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment and used Batteries
These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and electronic
products and batteries should not be mixed with general household waste.
For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please take them to applicable collection
points, in accordance with your national legislation and the Directives 2002/96/EC and 2006/66/EC.
By disposing of these products and batteries correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential
negative effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling.
EU
For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries, please contact your local municipality,
your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the items.
Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this waste, in accordance with national legislation.
For business users in the European Union
EU
If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for further information.
Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union
These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local
authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.
Cd
Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples):
This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this case it complies with the requirement set by the
Directive for the chemical involved.
2011
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
Miele Oven H 310 User Manual
Murphy Air Compressor S14E 92229N User Manual
Nikon Camcorder 1 S2 User Manual
Nikon Digital Camera SB2F01 11 User Manual
Nikon Universal Remote MC 36 User Manual
Novatel GPS Receiver SMART AG User Manual
Numark Industries Stereo Amplifier NPA3300 NPA6600 User Manual
OPPO Digital Blu ray Player BDP 105 User Manual
Panasonic Stereo Amplifier CY M7002EUC User Manual
ParaBody Home Gym 848101 User Manual